Classifications

• • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
  • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
  • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
  • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
  • C07D209/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
  • C07D209/04—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles
  • C07D209/10—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
• • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
  • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
  • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
  • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
  • C07D209/56—Ring systems containing three or more rings
  • C07D209/80—[b, c]- or [b, d]-condensed
• • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
  • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
  • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
  • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
  • C07D209/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
  • C07D209/04—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles
  • C07D209/10—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
  • C07D209/14—Radicals substituted by nitrogen atoms, not forming part of a nitro radical
• • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
  • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
  • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
  • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
  • C07D209/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
  • C07D209/04—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles
  • C07D209/10—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
  • C07D209/18—Radicals substituted by carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
  • C07D209/20—Radicals substituted by carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals substituted additionally by nitrogen atoms, e.g. tryptophane
• • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
  • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
  • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
  • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
  • C07D209/56—Ring systems containing three or more rings
  • C07D209/80—[b, c]- or [b, d]-condensed
  • C07D209/94—[b, c]- or [b, d]-condensed containing carbocyclic rings other than six-membered

Definitions

• Non-natural amino acids Non-natural amino acids, polypeptides containing at least one non-natural amino acid, methods for producing such non-natural amino acids and polypeptides, and uses of such non-natural amino acids and polypeptides for diagnostic, environmental, industrial, and therapeutic uses.
• non-genetically encoded amino acids i.e., "non-natural amino acids”
• chemical functional groups such as the epsilon -NH 2 of lysine, the sulfhydryl -SH of cysteine, the imino group of histidine, etc.
• Certain chemical functional groups are documented as inert to the functional groups found in the 20 common, genetically-encoded amino acids but react cleanly and efficiently to form stable linkages with functional groups that can be incorporated onto non-natural amino acids.
• Described herein are methods, compositions, techniques and strategies for making, purifying, characterizing, and using non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non- natural amino acid polypeptides.
• methods, compositions, techniques and strategies for derivatizing a non-natural amino acid and/or a non-natural amino acid polypeptide involve chemical derivatization, in other embodiments, biological derivatization, in other embodiments, physical derivatization, in other embodiments a combination of derivatizations.
• such derivatizations are regioselective.
• such derivatizations are regiospecific. In further or additional embodiments, such derivations are stoichiometric or near stoichiometric in both the non-natural amino acid containing reagent and the derivitizing reagent. In further or additional embodiments, such derivatizations are rapid at ambient temperature. In further or additional embodiments, such derivatizations occur in aqueous solutions. In further or additional embodiments, such derivatizations occur at a pH between about 4 and about 10.
• such derivatizations are stoichiometric, near stoichiometric or stoichiometric -like in both the non-natural amino acid containing reagent and the derivatizing reagent.
• methods which allow the stoichiometric, near stoichiometric or stoichiomctric-Iike incorporation of a desired group onto a non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• strategies, reaction mixtures, synthetic conditions which allow the stoichiometric, near stoichiometric or stoichiometric -like incorporation of a desired group onto a non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• non-natural amino acids for the chemical derivatization of peptides and proteins based upon the reactivity of a carbonyl group or masked carbonyl group, including a group containing at least one ketone group, and/or at least one aldehyde groups.
• non-natural amino acids for the chemical derivatization of peptides and proteins based upon the reactivity of a hydrazine group or masked hydrazine group.
• at least one of the aforementioned non-natural amino acids is incorporated into a polypeptide, that is, such embodiments are non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• the non-natural amino acids are functionalized on their sidechains such that their reaction with a derivatizing molecule generates an indole containing linkage.
• the non-natural amino acids are selected from amino acids having carbonyl and/or hydrazine sidechains.
• the non-natural amino acids comprise a masked sidechain, including a masked hydrazine group and/or a masked carbonyl group.
• the non-natural amino acids comprise carbonyl sidechains where the carbonyl is selected from a ketone or an aldehyde.
• the non-natural amino acids resemble a natural amino acid in structure but contains one of the aforementioned functional groups.
• the non-natural amino acids resemble phenylalanine or tyrosine (aromatic amino acids); while in a separate embodiment, the non-natural amino acids resemble alanine and leucine (hydrophobic amino acids).
• the non-natural amino acids have properties that are distinct from those of the natural amino acids. In one embodiment, such distinct properties are the chemical reactivity of the side chain, in a further embodiment this distinct chemical reactivity permits the side chain of the non-natural amino acid to undergo a reaction while being a unit of a polypeptide even though the side chains of the naturally-occurring amino acid units in the same polypeptide do not undergo the aforementioned reaction.
• the side chain of the non-natural amino acid has chemistry orthogonal to those of the naturally-occurring amino acids.
• the side chain of the non-natural amino acid comprises an electrophile-containing moiety; in a further embodiment, the electrophile-containing moiety on the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid can undergo, nucleophilic attack to generate a heterocycle-derivatized protein, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle-derivatized protein (e.g., containing an indole moiety).
• the non-natural amino acid are either separate molecules or incorporated into a polypeptide of any length; if the latter, then the polypeptide, in some embodiments, further incorporates additional naturally- occurring or non-natural amino acids.
• hydrazine-substituted molecules for the production of derivatized non-natural amino acid polypeptides based upon an indole-containing heterocycle linkage.
• hydrazine-substituted molecules used to derivatize carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides via the formation of an indole-containing heterocycle linkage.
• the aforementioned carbonyl- containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides are ketone-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• the carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acids comprise sidechains where the carbonyl is selected from a ketone, or an aldehyde.
• the hydrazine- substituted molecules comprise a desired functionality.
• the hydrazine- substituted molecules are hydrazine-substituted polyethylene glycol (PEG) molecules.
• the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid has a chemistry orthogonal to those of the naturally-occurring amino acids that allows the non-natural amino acid to react selectively with the hydrazine-substituted molecules.
• the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid comprises an electrophile-containing moiety that reacts selectively with the hydrazine-containing molecule; in a further embodiment, the electrophile- containing moiety on the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid can undergo nucleophilic attack to generate a heterocycle-derivatized protein, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle-derivatized protein.
• the modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides that result from the reaction of the derivatizing molecule with the non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• Further embodiments include any further modifications of the already modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• 0009) In another aspect are carbonyl-substituted molecules for the production of derivatized non-natural amino acid polypeptides based upon a heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle (e.g., an indole or a multi-cyclic structure containing an indole portion), linkage.
• a nitrogen-containing heterocycle e.g., an indole or a multi-cyclic structure containing an indole portion
• carbonyl- substituted molecules used to derivatize hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides via the formation of an indole-containing heterocycle linkage.
• carbonyl-substituted molecules that can form such heterocycle with a hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide in a pH range between about 1 and about 6.
• carbonyl-substituted molecules used to derivatize hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides via the formation of an indole-containing heterocycle linkage between the derivatizing molecule and the hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• the carbonyl-substituted molecules are ketone-substitued molecules, in other aspects aldehyde-substituted molecules.
• the carbonyl-substituted molecules comprise a desired functionality.
• the aldehyde-substituted molecules are aldehyde-substituted polyethylene glycol (PEG) molecules.
• the sidechain of the non- natural amino acid has a chemistry orthogonal to those of the naturally-occurring amino acids that allows the non-natural amino acid to react selectively with the carbonyl-substituted molecules.
• the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid comprises a moiety (e.g., hydrazine group) that reacts selectively with the carbonyl-containing molecule; in a further embodiment, the nucleophilic moiety on the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid can undergo electrophilic attack to generate a heterocyclic-derivatized protein, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle-derivatized protein.
• the modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides that result from the reaction of the derivatizing molecule with the non-natural amino acid polypeptides. Further embodiments include any further modifications of the already modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• mono-, bi- and multi-functional linkers for the generation of derivatized non- natural amino acid polypeptides based upon an indole-containing heterocycle linkage.
• molecular linkers (bi- and multi-functional) that can be used to connect carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides to other molecules.
• molecular linkers (bi- and multi-functional) that can be used to connect hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides to other molecules.
• the carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides comprise a ketone, or an aldehyde.
• the molecular linker contains a carbonyl group at one of its termini; in further embodiments, the carbonyl group is selected from an aldehyde group, or a ketone group.
• the hydrazine-substituted linker molecules are hydrazine-substituted polyethylene glycol (PEG) linker molecules.
• the carbonyl-substituted linker molecules are carbonyl-substituted polyethylene glycol (PEG) linker molecules.
• the phrase "other molecules" includes, by way of example only, proteins, other polymers and small molecules.
• the hydrazine-containing molecular linkers comprise the same or equivalent groups on all termini so that upon reaction with a carbonyl- containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide, the resulting product is the homo-multimerization of the carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• the homo-multimerization is a homo-dimerization.
• the carbonyl-containing molecular linkers comprise the same or equivalent groups on all termini so that upon reaction with a hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide, the resulting product is the homo-multimerization of the hydrazine-containing non- natural amino acid polypeptide.
• the homo-multimerization is a homo-dimerization.
• the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid has a chemistry orthogonal to those of the naturally-occurring amino acids that allows the non-natural amino acid to react selectively with the hydrazine- substituted linker molecules.
• the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid has a chemistry orthogonal to those of the naturally-occurring amino acids that allows the non-natural amino acid to react selectively with the carbonyl-substituted linker molecules.
• the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid comprises an electrophile-containing moiety that reacts selectively with the hydrazine- containing linker molecule; in a further embodiment, the electrophile-containing moiety on the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid can undergo nucleophilic attack by the hydrazine-containing linker molecule to generate a heterocycle-derivatized protein, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle-derivatized protein.
• the linked (modified) non-natural amino acid polypeptides that result from the reaction of the linker molecule with the non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• JOOIl I In one aspect are methods to derivatize proteins via the reaction of carbonyl and hydrazine reactants to generate a heterocycle-derivatized protein, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle-derivatized protein. Included within this aspect are methods for the derivatization of proteins based upon the condensation of carbonyl- and hydrazine-containing reactants to generate a heterocycle-derivatized protein adduct, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle-derivatized protein adduct.
• the hydrazine-substituted molecule can include proteins, other polymers, and small molecules.
• methods for the chemical synthesis of hydrazine-substituted molecules for the derivatization of carbonyl-substituted proteins can comprise peptides, other polymers (non-branched and branched) and small molecules.
• hydrazine-substituted molecules suitable for the derivatization of carbonyl- containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides, including by way of example only, ketone-, or aldehyde- containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• the non-natural amino acids arc incorporated site-specifically during the in vivo translation of proteins.
• the hydrazine-substituted molecules allow for the site-specific derivatization of carbonyl- containing non-natural amino acids via nucleophilic attack of each carbonyl group to form a heterocycle- derivatized polypeptide, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle-derivatized polypeptide in a site-specific fashion.
• the method for the preparation of hydrazine-substituted molecules provides access to a wide variety of site-specifically derivatized polypeptides.
• methods for synthesizing hydrazine-functionalized polyethyleneglycol (PEG) molecules are methods for synthesizing hydrazine-functionalized polyethyleneglycol (PEG) molecules.
• the carbonyl- substituted molecule is a ketone-, and/or an aldehyde-substituted molecule.
• the carbonyl-substituted molecules include proteins, polymers (non-branched and branched) and small molecules.
• such methods complement technology that enables the site-specific incorporation of non-natural amino acids during the in vivo translation of proteins.
• a hydrazine-substituted linker to a carbonyl-substituted protein via a condensation reaction to generate a heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, linkage.
• the carbonyl-substituted non-natural amino acid is a ketone-, and/or an aldehyde-substituted non-natural amino acid.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides are derivatized site- specifically and/or with precise control of three-dimensional structure, using a hydrazine-containing bi- functional linker.
• such methods are used to attach molecular linkers (mono- bi- and multifunctional) to carbonyl-containing (including by way of example ketone-, and'or an aldehyde-containing) non- natural amino acid polypeptides, wherein at least one of the linker termini contains a hydrazine group which can link to the carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides via a heterocycle, including a nitrogen- containing heterocycle, linkage.
• these linkers are used to connect the carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides to other molecules, including by way of example, proteins, other polymers (branched and non-branched) and small molecules.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide is linked to a water soluble polymer.
• the water soluble polymer comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety.
• the polyethylene glycol molecule is a bifunctional polymer.
• the bifunctional polymer is linked to a second polypeptide.
• the second polypeptide is identical to the first polypeptide, in other embodiments, the second polypeptide is a different polypeptide.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprises at least two amino acids linked to a water soluble polymer comprising a poly(ethylene glycol) moiety.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprises a substitution, addition or deletion that increases affinity of the non-natural amino acid polypeptide for a receptor. In some embodiments, the non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprises a substitution, addition, or deletion that increases the stability of the non-natural amino acid polypeptide. In some embodiments, the non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprises a substitution, addition, or deletion that increases the aqueous solubility of the non-natural amino acid polypeptide. In some embodiments, the non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprises a substitution, addition, or deletion that increases the solubility of the non-natural amino acid polypeptide produced in a host cell. In some embodiments, the non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprises a substitution, addition, or deletion that modulates protease resistance, serum half-life, immunogenicity, and/or expression relative to the amino-acid polypeptide without the substitution, addition or deletion.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide is an agonist, partial agonist, antagonist, partial antagonist, or inverse agonist.
• the agonist, partial agonist, antagonist, partial antagonist, or inverse agonist comprises a non-natural amino acid linked to a water soluble polymer.
• the water polymer comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety.
• the polypeptide comprising a non-natural amino acid linked to a water soluble polymer prevents dimerization of the corresponding receptor.
• the polypeptide comprising a non-natural amino acid linked to a water soluble polymer modulates binding of the polypeptide to a binding partner, ligand or receptor.
• the polypeptide comprising a non-natural amino acid linked to a water soluble polymer modulates one or more properties or activities of the polypeptide.
• the selector codon is selected from the group consisting of an amber codon, ochre codon, opal codon, a unique codon, a rare codon, an unnatural codon, a five-base codon, and a four-base codon.
• Also described herein are methods of making a non-natural amino acid polypeptide linked to a water soluble polymer.
• the method comprises contacting an isolated polypeptide comprising a non-natural amino acid with a water soluble polymer comprising a moiety that reacts with the non-natural amino acid.
• the non-natural amino acid incorporated into is reactive toward a water soluble polymer that is otherwise unreactive toward any of the 20 common amino acids.
• the water polymer comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety. The molecular weight of the polymer optionally is within a desired polymer molecular weight range.
• compositions comprising a polypeptide comprising at least one of the non- natural amino acids described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
• the non- natural amino acid is linked to a water soluble polymer.
• pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a polypeptide, wherein at least one amino acid is substituted by a non-natural amino acid.
• the non-natural amino acid comprises a saccharide moiety.
• the water soluble polymer is linked to the polypeptide via a saccharide moiety.
• prodrugs of the non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides, and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides are prodrugs of the non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides, and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides; further described herein are compositions comprising such prodrugs and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
• metabolites of the non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides, and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides in some embodiments, such metabolites have a desired activity that complements or synergizes with the activity of the non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides, and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• non-natural amino acids non-natural amino acid polypeptides
• modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein to provide a desired metabolite to an organism, including a patient in need of such metabolite.
• cells comprising a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide comprising a selector codon.
• the cells comprise an orthogonal RNA synthetase, and/or an orthogonal tRNA for substituting a non-natural amino acid into the polypeptide.
• the cells are in a cell culture, whereas in other embodiments the cells of part of a multicellular organism, including amphibians, reptiles, birds, and mammals.
• further embodiments include expression of the polynucleotide to produce the non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• Such organisms include unicellular and multicellular organisms, including amphibians, reptiles, birds, and mammals.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide is produced in vitro.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide is produced in cell lysate.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide is produced by ribosomal translation.
• the methods comprise culturing cells comprising a polynucleotide or polynucleotides encoding a polypeptide, an orthogonal RNA synthetase and/or an orthogonal tRNA under conditions to permit expression of the polypeptide; and purifying the polypeptide from the cells and/or culture medium.
• arrays containing at least one non-natural amino acid, at least one non-natural amino acid polypeptide, and/or at least one modified non-natural amino acid are also described herein. Also described herein are arrays containing at least one polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide comprising a selector codon. The arrays described herein are used, for example, to screen for the production of the non-natural amino acid polypeptides in an organism (either by detecting transcription of the polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide or by detecting the translation of the polypeptide).
• a pharmaceutical composition which comprises a polypeptide comprising a non-natural amino acid and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
• the non-natural amino acid is coupled to a water soluble polymer.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid selected from the group consisting of an indole-containing non- natural amino acid, a carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid, and a hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid.
• non-natural amino acids have been synthetically incorporated into the polypeptide as described herein.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprises at least one non-natural amino acid selected from amino acids of Formula I-XV.
• such non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprises at least one natural amino acid selected from amino acids of compounds 1-4.
• A is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkylene, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker, linked at one end to an indole-containing moiety, the linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, - arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-, -O
• Ri is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; and R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; n is O, 1, 2, or 3, and m is O, 1 , 2, or 3, provided that at least one of n or m is not O; wherein, each ring in structures 1, 2, 3, and 4 that has an associated R a group can contain O, 1, or 2 R a groups and each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, -N(R") 2 , -C(O)R", -C(O)N(R"),, -OR", and -S(O) 1 R", where k is 1 , 2, or 3, where each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; or when more than one R a group is present, two
• R a optionally form an aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl
• each OfR 3 and R 4 is independently H, halogen, lower alkyl, or substituted lower alkyl, or R 3 and R 4 or two R 3 groups optionally form a cycloalkyl or a heterocycloalkyl
• each R 5 is independently H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, substituted alkylalkoxy, polyalkylene oxide, substituted polyalkylene oxide, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkaryl, substituted alkaryl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, -(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-ON(R") 2 , OH, NH 2 , CN, NO 2 ,
• R 5 is L-X, where, X is a selected from the group consisting of: a label; a dye; a polymer; a water- soluble polymer; a derivative of polyethylene glycol; a photocrossl inker; a cytotoxic compound; a drug; an affinity label; a photoaffinity label; a reactive compound; a resin; a second protein or polypeptide or polypeptide analog; an antibody or antibody fragment; a metal chelator; a cofactor; a fatty acid; a carbohydrate; a polynucleotide; a DNA; a RNA; an antisense polynucleotide; a saccharide, a water-soluble dendnmer, a cyclodextrin, a biomaterial; a nanoparticle;
• X is selected from a water-soluble polymer; a polyalkylene oxide; a polyethylene glycol; a derivative of polyethylene glycol; a photocrosslinker; at least one amino acid; at least one sugar group; at least one nucleotide; at least one nucleoside; a ligand; biotin; a biotin analogue; a detectable label; and any combination thereof;
• both A and B are bonds, each R 3 is H and R 4 is H.
• and Rj are at least one amino acid.
• each of R t and R 2 are at least two amino acids.
• each of Ri and R 2 are at least three amino acids.
• each of R 1 and R 2 are at least four amino acids.
• and R 2 are at least five amino acids.
• and R 2 are at least eix amino acids.
• a method for treating a disorder, condition or disease comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a non-natural amino acid polypeptide with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
• a method for treating a disorder, condition or disease wherein X is a water-soluble polymer.
• a method for treating a disorder, condition or disease wherein X is a derivative of polyethylene glycol.
• X is a second polypeptide.
• methods for treating a disorder, condition or disease, wherein the second polypeptide is a peptide containing a non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• methods for treating a disorder, condition or disease, wherein the second polypeptide has the same amino acid structure as the non-natural amino acid polypeptide of compounds having the structures 1-4.
• a method for treating a disorder, condition or disease, wherein X is a detectable label.
• methods for treating a disorder, condition or disease wherein the at least one non- natural amino acid of compounds 1-4 is incorporated at a specific site within the polypeptide.
• methods for treating a disorder, condition or disease wherein the non-natural amino acid of compounds 1-4 is incorporated using a translation system.
• a method for treating a disorder, condition or disease comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid selected from the group consisting of:
• ⁇ is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkylene, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker, linked at one end to an indole-containing moiety, the linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, - arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-, -
• Ri is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; and R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; n is O, 1, 2, or 3, and m is O, 1, 2, or 3, provided that at least one of n or m is not O; wherein, each ring in structures 1 , 2, 3, and 4 that has an associated R a group can contain O, 1, or 2 R a groups and each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, -N(R") 2 , -C(O)R", -C(O)N(R") 2 , -OR", and -S(O) k R", where k is 1, 2, or 3, where each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; or when more than one R a group is present, two R 3 optionally form an
• R 5 is L-X, where, X is a selected from the group consisting of: a label; a dye; a polymer; a water- soluble polymer; a derivative of polyethylene glycol; a photocrosslinker; a cytotoxic compound; a drug; an affinity label; a photoaff ⁇ nity label;
• X is selected from a water-soluble polymer; a polyalkylene oxide; a polyethylene glycol: a derivative of polyethylene glycol; a photocrosslinker; at least one amino acid; at least one sugar group; at least one nucleotide; at least one nucleoside; a ligand; biotin; a biotin analogue; a detectable label; and any combination thereof;
• both A and B are bonds, each R 3 is H and R 4 is H.
• and R 2 are at least one amino acid.
• and R 2 are at least two amino acids.
• and R 2 are at least three amino acids.
• each of Ri and R 2 are at least four amino acids.
• each of R, and R 2 are at least five amino acids.
• and R 2 are at least eix amino acids.
• Jn yet another embodiment is a method for treating a disorder, condition or disease further comprising administering a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier with the therapeutically effective amount of the polypeptide having the compounds of Structures 5-8.
• a further embodiment is a method for treating a disorder, condition or disease, wherein R, and R* are both polypeptides.
• a method for treating a disorder, condition or disease wherein X is a drug.
• a method for treating a disorder, condition or disease wherein X is a second polypeptide.
• a method for treating a disorder, condition or disease wherein the second polypeptide is a peptide containing a non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• a non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid having the structure of compounds 1-4, wherein the polypeptide is a protein homologous to a therapeutic protein selected from the group consisting of: alpha- 1 antitrypsin, angiostatin, antihemolytic factor, antibody, antibody fragment, apolipoprotein, apoprotein, atrial natriuretic factor, atrial natriuretic polypeptide, atrial peptide, C-X-C chemokine, T39765, NAP-2, ENA-78, gro-a, gro-b, gro-c, IP-10, GCP-2, NAP-4, SDF-I , PF4, MIG, calcitonin, c-kit ligand, cytokine, CC chemokine, monocyte chemoattractant protein-1, monocyte
• a further embodiment are methods for treating a disorder, condition, or disease, the method comprising administering compounds having the structures 5-8, wherein the at least one non-natural acid is incorporated at a specific site within the polypeptide.
• methods for treating a disorder, condition, or disease the method comprising administering compounds having the structures 5-8, wherein the non-natural amino acid is incorporated using a translation system.
• methods for treating a disorder, condition, or disease the method comprising administering compounds having the structures 5-8, wherein the non-natural amino acid is incorporated into the polypeptide using a translation system and a post translation modification system.
• methods for treating a disorder, condition, or disease comprising administering compounds having the structures 5-8, wherein the polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid is stable for at least 1 month.
• methods for treating a disorder, condition, or disease the method comprising administering compounds having the structures 5-8, wherein the polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid is stable for at least 2 weeks.
• a non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one indole-containing non-natural amino acid and the resulting indole-containing non- natural amino acid polypeptide increases the bioavailability of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• compositions for treating a disorder, condition or disease comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one indole-containing non-natural amino acid and the resulting indole-containing non- natural amino acid polypeptide increases the safety profile of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• inventions are methods for treating a disorder, condition or disease, the method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one indole-containing non-natural amino acid and the resulting indole-containing non- natural amino acid polypeptide increases the water solubility of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• a disorder, condition or disease comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one indole-containing non-natural amino acid and the resulting indole-containing non- natural amino acid polypeptide increases the therapeutic half-life of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• a disorder, condition or disease comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one indole-containing non-natural amino acid and the resulting indole-containing non- natural amino acid polypeptide increases the serum half-life of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• inventions are methods for treating a disorder, condition or disease, the method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one indole-containing non-natural amino acid and the resulting indole-containing non- natural amino acid polypeptide extends the circulation time of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• compositions for treating a disorder, condition or disease comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one indole-containing non-natural amino acid and the resulting indole-containing non- natural amino acid polypeptide modulates the biological activity of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• inventions are methods for treating a disorder, condition or disease, the method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one indole-containing non-natural amino acid and the resulting indole-containing non- natural amino acid polypeptide modulates the immunogenicity of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• affinity label refers to a label which reversibly or irreversibly binds another molecule, either to modify it, destroy it, or form a compound with it.
• affinity labels include enzymes and their substrates, or antibodies and their antigens.
• alkoxy refers to those alkyl groups linked to molecules via an oxygen atom, an amino group, or a sulfur atom, respectively.
• alkyl by itself or as part of another molecule means, unless otherwise stated, a straight or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon radical, or combination thereof, which optionally is fully saturated, mono- or polyunsaturated and can include di- and multivalent radicals, having the number of carbon atoms designated (i.e. CpC 1O means one to ten carbons).
• saturated hydrocarbon radicals include, but are not limited to, groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, cyclohexyl, (cyclohexyl)methyl, cyclopropylmethyl, homologs and isomers of, for example, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, and the like.
• An unsaturated alkyl group is one having one or more double bonds or triple bonds.
• alkyl groups examples include, but are not limited to, vinyl, 2-propenyl, crotyl, 2- isopentenyl, 2-(butadienyl), 2,4-pentadienyl, 3-(l ,4-pentadienyl), ethynyl, 1- and 3-propynyl, 3-butynyl, and the higher homologs and isomers.
• alkyl unless otherwise noted, is also meant to include those derivatives of alkyl defined in more detail herein, such as “heteroalkyl", “haloalkyl” and "homoalkyl”.
• alkylene by itself or as part of another molecule means a divalent radical derived from an alkane, as exemplified, by (-CH 2 -),, wherein n is 1 to about 24.
• such groups include, but are not limited to, groups having 10 or fewer carbon atoms such as the structures -CH 2 CH 2 - and - CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -.
• a "lower alkyl” or “lower alkylene” is a shorter chain alkyl or alkylene group, generally having eight or fewer carbon atoms.
• alkylene unless otherwise noted, is also meant to include those groups described herein as "heteroalkylene.”
• amino acid refers to naturally occurring and non-natural amino acids, as well as amino acid analogs and amino acid mimetics that function in a manner similar to the naturally occurring amino acids.
• Naturally encoded amino acids are the 20 common amino acids (alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleuciiie, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine) and pyrolysine and selenocysteine.
• Amino acid analogs refers to compounds that have the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid, by way of example only, an OJ-carbon that is bound to a hydrogen, a carboxyl group, an amino group, and an R group. Such analogs optionally have modified R groups (by way of example, norleucine) or optionally modified peptide backbones while still retaining the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid.
• Non-limiting examples of amino acid analogs include homoserine, norleucine, methionine sulfoxide, methionine methyl sulfonium.
• Amino acids may be referred to herein by either their name, their three letter symbols or by the one- letter symbols recommended by the IUPAC-IUB Biochemical Nomenclature Commission. Additionally, nucleotides, may be referred to by their commonly accepted single-letter codes.
• antibody fragment is meant any form of an antibody other than the full-length form.
• Antibody fragments herein include antibodies that are smaller components that exist within full-length antibodies, and antibodies that have been engineered.
• Antibody fragments include but are not limited to Fv, Fc, Fab, and (Fab')2, single chain Fv (scFv), diabodies, triabodies, tetrabodies, bifunctional hybrid antibodies, CDRl, CDR2, CDR3, combinations of CDR's, variable regions, framework regions, constant regions, heavy chains, light chains, and variable regions,- and alternative scaffold non-antibody molecules, bispecific antibodies, and the like (Maynard & Georgiou, 2000, Annu. Rev. Biomed. Eng.
• Another functional substructure is a single chain Fv (scFv), comprised of the variable regions of the immunoglobulin heavy and light chain, covalently connected by a peptide linker (S-z Hu et al., 1996, Cancer Research, 56, 3055-3061).
• scFv single chain Fv
• These small (Mr 25,000) proteins generally retain specificity and affinity for antigen in a single polypeptide and can provide a convenient building block for larger, antigen-specific molecules.
• aromatic refers to a closed ring structure which has at least one ring having a conjugated pi electron system and includes both carbocyclic aryl and heterocyclic aryl (or “heteroaryl” or “heteroaromatic") groups.
• the carbocyclic or heterocyclic aromatic group optionally contains from 5 to 20 ring atoms.
• the term includes monocyclic rings linked covalently or fused-ring polycyclic (i.e., rings which share adjacent pairs of carbon atoms) groups.
• aromatic group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
• aromatic or "aryl”, groups include phenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 4- biphenyl, anthracenyl, and phenanthracenyl. Substituents for each of the above noted aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are selected from the group of acceptable substituents described herein.
• for brevity, the term "aromatic” or “aryl” when used in combination with other terms (including but not limited to, aryloxy, arylthioxy, aralkyl) includes both aryl and heteroaryl rings as defined above.
• aralkyl or “alkaryl” is meant to include those radicals in which an aryl group is attached to an alkyl group (including but not limited to, benzyl, phenethyl, pyridylmethyl and the like) including those alkyl groups in which a carbon atom (including but not limited to, a methylene group) has been replaced by a heteroatom, by way of example only, by an oxygen atom.
• alkyl group including but not limited to, benzyl, phenethyl, pyridylmethyl and the like
• alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, phenoxymethyl, 2-pyridyloxymethyl, 3-(l-naphthyloxy)propyl, and the like.
• arylene refers to a divalent aryl radical.
• arylene include phenylene, pyridinylene, pyrimidinylene and thiophenylene. Substituents for arylene groups are selected from the group of acceptable substituents described herein.
• at least one amino acid refers to a single amino acid, a multiplicity of amino acids, an oligopeptide, an amino acid dimer, an amino acid trimer, an amino acid tetramer, a polypeptide, a protein, an antibody, or any other connected chain of amino acids.
• a “bifunctional polymer”, also referred to as a "bifunctional linker”, refers to a polymer comprising two functional groups that are capable of reacting specifically with other moieties to form covalent or non- covalent linkages.
• Such moieties include, but are not limited to, the side groups on natural or non-natural amino acids or peptides which contain such natural or non-natural amino acids.
• a bifunctional linker has a functional group reactive with a group on a first peptide, and another functional group which is reactive with a group on a second peptide, whereby forming a conjugate that includes the first peptide, the bifunctional linker and the second peptide.
• Procedures and linker molecules for attachment of various compounds to peptides include, e.g., European Patent Application No. 188,256; U.S. Patent Nos. 4,671,958, 4,659.839, 4,414,148. 4,699,784; 4,680,338; and 4,569,789.
• a bi-functional polymer or multi- functional polymer is optionally any desired length or molecular weight, and is optionally selected to provide a particular desired spacing or conformation between one or more molecules linked to a compound and molecules it binds to or the compound.
• bioavailability refers to the rate and extent to which a substance or its active moiety is delivered from a pharmaceutical dosage form and becomes available at the site of action or in the general circulation.
• Increases in bioavailability refers to increasing the rate and extent a substance or its active moiety is delivered from a pharmaceutical dosage form and becomes available at the site of action or in the general circulation.
• an increase in bioavailability is indicated as an increase in concentration of the substance or its active moiety in the blood when compared to other substances or active moieties. This method is optionally used for evaluating the bioavailability of any polypeptide.
• biologically active molecule when used herein means any substance which can affect any physical or biochemical properties of a biological system, pathway, molecule, or interaction relating to an organism, including but not limited to, viruses, bacteria, bacteriophage, transposon, prion, insects, fungi, plants, animals, and humans.
• biologically active molecules include but are not limited to any substance intended for diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease in humans or other animals, or to otherwise enhance physical or mental well-being of humans or animals.
• biologically active molecules include, but are not limited to, peptides, proteins, enzymes, small molecule drugs, hard drugs, soft drugs, carbohydrates, inorganic atoms or molecules, dyes, lipids, nucleosides, radionuclides, oligonucleotides, toxins, cells, viruses, liposomes, microparticles and micelles.
• Classes of biologically active agents that are suitable for use with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, drugs, prodrugs, radionuclides, imaging agents, polymers, antibiotics, fungicides, anti-viral agents, anti- inflammatory agents, anti-tumor agents, cardiovascular agents, anti-anxiety agents, hormones, growth factors, steroidal agents, microbially derived toxins, and the like.
• modulating biological activity is meant increasing or decreasing the reactivity of a polypeptide, altering the selectivity of the polypeptide, enhancing or decreasing the substrate selectivity of the polypeptide. Analysis of modified biological activity can be performed by comparing the biological activity of the non- natural polypeptide to that of the natural polypeptide.
• biomaterial refers to a biologically-derived material, including but not limited to material obtained from bioreactors and/or from recombinant methods and techniques.
• biophysical probe refers to probes which can detect or monitor structural changes in molecules. Such molecules include, but are not limited to, proteins; and the “biophysical probe” is optionally used to detect or monitor interaction of proteins with other macromolecules. Examples of biophysical probes include, but are not limited to, spin-labels, a fluorophores, and photoactivatible groups.
• biosynthetically refers to any method utilizing a translation system (cellular or non-cellular), including use of at least one of the following components: a polynucleotide, a codon, a tRNA, and a ribosome.
• non-natural amino acids are "biosynthetically incorporated" into non- natural amino acid polypeptides using the methods and techniques described in section VJH "In vivo generation of polypeptides comprising non-natural amino acids”.
• biotin analogue or also referred to as “biotin mimic”, as used herein, is any molecule, other than biotin, which bind with high affinity to avidin and/or streptavidin.
• carbonyl refers to a group containing at a moiety selecting from the group consisting of -C(O)-, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, and -C(S)-, including, but not limited to, groups containing a least one ketone group, and/or at least one aldehyde groups, and/or at least one ester group, and/or at least one carboxylic acid group, and/or at least one thioester group.
• Such carbonyl groups include ketones, aldehydes, carboxylic acids, esters, and thioesters.
• such groups are optionally part of linear, branched, or cyclic molecules.
• chemically cleavable group also referred to as “chemically labile”, as used herein, refers to a group which breaks or cleaves upon exposure to acid, base, oxidizing agents, reducing agents, chemical inititiators, or radical initiators.
• chemiluminescent group refers to a group which emits light as a result of a chemical reaction without the addition of heat.
• luminol (5-amino-2,3-dihydro-l,4- phthalazinedione) reacts with oxidants like hydrogen peroxide (H 2 O 2 ) in the presence of a base and a metal catalyst to produce an excited state product (3-aminophthalate, 3-APA).
• oxidants like hydrogen peroxide (H 2 O 2 )
• H 2 O 2 hydrogen peroxide
• 3-APA an excited state product
• chromophore refers to a molecule which absorbs light of visible wavelengths, UV wavelengths or IR wavelengths.
• Cofactor refers to an atom or molecule essential for the action of a large molecule. Cofactors include, but are not limited to, inorganic ions, coenzymes, proteins, or some other factor necessary for the activity of enzymes. Examples include, heme in hemoglobin, magnesium in chlorophyll, and metal ions for proteins.
• a “comparison window,” as used herein, refers a segment ofany one of contiguous positions used to compare a sequence to a reference sequence of the same number of contiguous positions after the two sequences are optimally aligned.
• Such contiguous positions include, but are not limited to a group consisting of from about 20 to about 600 sequential units, including about 50 to about 200 sequential units, and about 100 to about 150 sequential units.
• sequences include polypeptides and polypeptides containing non-natural amino acids, with the sequential units include, but are not limited to natural and non-natural amino acids.
• such sequences include polynucleotides with nucleotides being the corresponding sequential units.
• Methods of alignment of sequences for comparison include, but are not limited to, the local homology algorithm of Smith and Waterman (1970) Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482c, by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman and Wunsch (1970) J. MoI. Biol. 48:443, by the search for similarity method of Pearson and Lipman (1988) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444, by computerized implementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package, Genetics Computer Group, 575 Science Dr., Madison, WI), or by manual alignment and visual inspection (see, e.g., ⁇ usubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (1995 supplement)).
• an algorithm which is used to determine percent sequence identity and sequence similarity are the BLAST and BLAST 2.0 algorithms, which are described in Altschul et al. (1997) Nuc. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402, and Altschul et al. (1990) J. MoI. Biol. 215:403-410, respectively.
• Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information.
• the BLAST algorithm parameters W, T, and X determine the sensitivity and speed of the alignment.
• the BLAST algorithm is typically performed with the "low complexity" filter turned off.
• the BLAST algorithm also performs a statistical analysis of the similarity between two sequences (see, e.g., Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5787).
• BLAST algorithm One measure of similarity provided by the BLAST algorithm is the smallest sum probability (P(N)), which provides an indication of the probability by which a match between two nucleotide or amino acid sequences would occur by chance.
• P(N) the smallest sum probability
• a nucleic acid is considered similar to a reference sequence if the smallest sum probability in a comparison of the test nucleic acid to the reference nucleic acid is less than about 0.2, or less than about 0.01, or less than about 0.001.
• the term "conservatively modified variants" applies to both natural and non-natural amino acid and natural and non-natural nucleic acid sequences, and combinations thereof.
• “conservatively modified variants” refers to those natural and non-natural nucleic acids which encode identical or essentially identical natural and non-natural amino acid sequences, or where the natural and non-natural nucleic acid does not encode a natural and non-natural amino acid sequence, to essentially identical sequences.
• a large number of functionally identical nucleic acids encode any given protein.
• the codons GCA, GCC, GCG and GCU all encode the amino acid alanine.
• the codon can be altered to any of the corresponding codons described without altering the encoded polypeptide.
• nucleic acid variations are "silent variations," which are one species of conservatively modified variations.
• every natural or non-natural nucleic acid sequence herein which encodes a natural or non-natural polypeptide also describes every possible silent variation of the natural or non-natural nucleic acid.
• Each codon in a natural or non-natural nucleic acid (except AUG, which is ordinarily the only codon for methionine, and TGG, which is ordinarily the only codon for tryptophan) can be modified to yield a functionally identical molecule. Accordingly, each silent variation of a natural and non-natural nucleic acid which encodes a natural and non-natural polypeptide is implicit in each described sequence.
• amino acid sequences individual substitutions, deletions or additions to a nucleic acid, peptide, polypeptide, or protein sequence which alters, adds or deletes a single natural and non-natural amino acid or a small percentage of natural and non-natural amino acids in the encoded sequence is a "conservatively modified variant" where the alteration results in the deletion of an amino acid, addition of an amino acid, or substitution of a natural and non-natural amino acid with a chemically similar amino acid.
• Conservative substitution tables available in the scientific literature, provide functionally similar natural amino acids.
• Such conservatively modified variants are in addition to and do not exclude polymorphic variants, interspecies homologs, and alleles of the methods and compositions described herein.
• Cysteine (C), Methionine (M) see, e.g., Creighton, Proteins:Structures and Molecular Properties (W H Freeman & Co.; 2nd edition (December 1993).
• cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl represent, unless otherwise stated, cyclic versions of “alkyl” and “heteroalkyl”, respectively.
• a cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl include saturated, partially unsaturated and fully unsaturated ring linkages.
• a heteroatom can occupy the position at which the heterocycle is attached to the remainder of the molecule.
• the heteroatom includes, but is not limited to, oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur.
• cycloalkyl examples include, but are not limited to, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohexenyl, 3-cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and the like.
• heterocycloalkyl examples include, but are not limited to, l- ⁇ l,2,5,6-tetrahydro ⁇ yridyl), 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 3-mo ⁇ holinyl, tetrahydrofuran-2-yl, tetrahydrofuran-3-yl, tetrahydrothien-2-yl, tetrahydrothien-3-yl, 1-piperazinyl, 2-piperazinyl, and the like.
• the term encompasses multicycljc structures, including but not limited to, bicyclic and tricyclic ring structures.
• heterocycloalkylene by itself or as part of another molecule means a divalent radical derived from heterocycloalkyl
• cycloalkylene by itself or as part of another molecule means a divalent radical derived from cycloalkyl.
• cyclodextrin refers to cyclic carbohydrates consisting of at least six to eight glucose molecules in a ring formation. The outer part of the ring contains water soluble groups; at the center of the ring is a relatively nonpolar cavity able to accommodate small molecules.
• cytotoxic refers to a compound which harms cells.
• desired functionality refers to any one of the following groups: a label; a dye; a polymer; a water-soluble polymer; a derivative of polyethylene glycol; a photocrosslinker; a cytotoxic compound; a drug; an affinity label; a photoaffinity label; a reactive compound; a resin; a second protein or polypeptide or polypeptide analog; an antibody or antibody fragment; a metal chelator; a cofactor; a fatty acid; a carbohydrate; a polynucleotide; a DNA; a RNA; an antisense polynucleotide; a saccharide, a water-soluble dendrimer, a cyclodextrin, a biomaterial; a nanoparticle; a spin label; a fluorophore; a metal-containing moiety; a
• detectable label refers to a label which is optionally observable using analytical techniques including, but not limited to, fluorescence, chemiluminescence, electron-spin resonance, ultraviolet/visible absorbance spectroscopy, mass spectrometry, nuclear magnetic resonance, magnetic resonance, and electrochemical methods.
• carbonyl refers to a groups/molecules containing at least one aldehyde or one ketone.
• drug refers to any substance used in the prevention, diagnosis, alleviation, treatment, or cure of a disease or condition.
• drug refers to any substance used in the prevention, diagnosis, alleviation, treatment, or cure of a disease or condition.
• drug refers to any substance used in the prevention, diagnosis, alleviation, treatment, or cure of a disease or condition.
• die refers to a soluble, coloring substance which contains a chromophore.
• effective amount refers to a sufficient amount of an agent or a compound being administered which will relieve to some extent one or more of the symptoms of the disease or condition being treated. The result can be reduction and/or alleviation of the signs, symptoms, or causes of a disease, or any other desired alteration of a biological system.
• an agent or a compound being administered includes, but is not limited to, a natural amino acid polypeptide, non-natural amino acid polypeptide, modified natural amino acid polypeptide, or modified non-amino acid polypeptide.
• Compositions containing such natural amino acid polypeptides, non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified natural amino acid polypeptides, or modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides can be administered for prophylactic, enhancing, and/or therapeutic treatments.
• An appropriate "effective" amount in any individual case is optionally determined using techniques, such as a dose escalation study.
• the term "electron dense group,” as used herein, refers to a group which scatters electrons when irradiated with an electron beam.
• groups include, but are not limited to, ammonium molybdate, bismuth subnitrate cadmium iodide, 99%, carbohydrazide, ferric chloride hexahydrate, hexamethylene tetramine, 98.5%, indium trichloride anhydrous, lanthanum nitrate, lead acetate trihydrate, lead citrate trihydrale, lead nitrate, periodic acid, phosphomolybdic acid, phosphotungstic acid, potassium ferricyanide, potassium ferrocyanide, ruthenium red, silver nitrate, silver proteinate (Ag Assay: 8.0-8.5%) "Strong", silver tetraphenylporphin (S- TPPS), sodium chloroaurate, sodium tungstate, thallium nitrate, thiose
• the term "energy transfer agent,” as used herein, refers to a molecule which can either donate or accept energy from another molecule.
• fluorescence resonance energy transfer FLR
• FRET fluorescence resonance energy transfer
• the terms “enhance” or “enhancing” means to increase or prolong either in potency or duration a desired effect.
• “enhancing” the effect of therapeutic agents refers to the ability to increase or prolong, either in potency or duration, the effect of therapeutic agents on during treatment of a disease, disorder or condition.
• an “enhancing-effective amount,” as used herein, refers to an amount adequate to enhance the effect of a therapeutic agent in the treatment of a disease, disorder or condition. When used in a patient, amounts effective for this use will depend on the severity and course of the disease, disorder or condition, previous therapy, the patient's health status and response to the drugs, and the judgment of the treating physician.
• the term “eukaryote” refers to organisms belonging to the phylogenetic domain Eucarya, including but not limited to animals (including but not limited to, mammals, insects, reptiles, birds, etc.), ciliates, plants (including but not limited to, monocots, dicots, and algae), fungi, yeasts, flagellates, microsporidia, and protists. [00951 The term "fatty acid,” as used herein, refers to carboxylic acids with about C6 or longer hydrocarbon side chain.
• fluorophore refers to a molecule which upon excitation emits photons and is thereby fluorescent.
• functional group refers to portions or units of a molecule at which chemical reactions occur. The terms are somewhat synonymous in the chemical arts and are used herein to indicate the portions of molecules that perform some function or activity and are reactive with other molecules.
• halogen includes fluorine, chlorine, iodine, and bromine.
• haloacyl refers to acyl groups which contain halogen moieties, including, but not limited to, -C(O)CH 3 , -C(O)CF 3 , -C(O)CH 2 OCH 3 , and the like.
• haloalkyl refers to alkyl groups which contain halogen moieties, including, but not limited to, -CF 3 and -CH 2 CF 3 and the like.
• heteroalkyl refers to straight or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon radicals, or combinations thereof, consisting of an alkyl group and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, Si and S, and wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom is optionally quaternized.
• the heteroatom(s) O, N and S and Si are optionally placed at any interior position of the heteroalkyl group or at the position at which the alkyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule.
• heterocyclic-based linkage or “heterocycle linkage” refers to a moiety formed from the reaction of a carbonyl group with a hydrazine group.
• the resulting reaction product is a heterocycle, including a heteroaryl group or a heterocycloalkyl group.
• the resulting heterocycle group serves as a chemical link between a non-natural amino acid or non-natural amino acid polypeptide and another functional group.
• the heterocycle linkage includes a nitrogen-containing heterocycle linkage, including by way of example only a a pyrrole linkage, an indole linkage, a benzodiazepine linkage, and a pyrazalone linkage.
• heteroalkylene refers to a divalent radical derived from heteroalkyl, as exemplified, but not limited by, -CH 2 -CH 2 -S-CH 2 -CH 2 - and -CH 2 -S-CH 2 -CH 2 -NH-CH 2 -.
• the same or different heteroatoms can also occupy either or both of the chain termini (including but not limited to.
• the formula -C(O) 2 R'- represents both -C(O) 2 R'- and -R 1 C(O) 2 -.
• heteroaryl or “heteroaromatic,” as used herein, refers to aryl groups which contain at least one heteroatom selected from N, O, and S; wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen atom(s) areoptionally quaternized. Heteroaryl groups are optionally substituted or unsubstituted. A heteroaryl group is optionally attached to the remainder of the molecule through a heteroatom.
• heteroaryl groups include 1 -pyrrolyl, 2-pyrrolyl, 3- ⁇ yrrolyl, 3-pyrazolyl, 2-imidazolyl, 4- imidazolyl, pyrazinyl, 2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, 2-phenyl-4-oxazolyl, 5-oxazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-isoxazolyl, 5- isoxazolyl, 2-thiazolyI, 4-thiazolyl, 5-thiazolyl, 2-furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4- pyridyl, 2-pyrimidyl, 4-pyrimidyl, 5-benzothiazolyl, purinyl, 2-benzimidazolyl, 5-indoIyL 1-isoquinolyl, 5- isoquinolyl, 2-quinoxalinyl, 5-quinoxalinyl, 3-quinolyl,
• sequences or subsequences refers to two or more sequences or subsequences which are the same.
• substantially identical refers to two or more sequences which have a percentage of sequential units which are the same when compared and aligned for maximum correspondence over a comparison window, or designated region as measured using comparison algorithms or by manual alignment and visual inspection.
• two or more sequences are “substantially identical” if the sequential units are about 60% identical, about 65% identical, about 70% identical, about 75% identical, about 80% identical, about 85% identical, about 90% identical, or about 95% identical over a specified region. Such percentages to describe the "percent identity" of two or more sequences.
• the identity of a sequence can exist over a region that is at least about 75-100 sequential units in length, over a region that is about 50 sequential units in length, or, where not specified, across the entire sequence.
• This definition also refers to the complement of a test sequence.
• two or more polypeptide sequences are identical when the amino acid residues are the same, while two or more polypeptide sequences are "substantially identical" if the amino acid residues are about 60% identical, about 65% identical, about 70% identical, about 75% identical, about 80% identical, about 85% identical, about 90% identical, or about 95% identical over a specified region.
• the identity can exist over a region that is at least about 75-100 amino acids in length, over a region that is about 50 amino acids in length, or, where not specified, across the entire sequence of a polypeptide sequence.
• two or more polynucleotide sequences are identical when the nucleic acid residues are the same, while two or more polynucleotide sequences are "substantially identical" if the nucleic acid residues are about 60% identical, about 65% identical, about 70% identical, about 75% identical, about 80% identical, about 85% identical, about 90% identical, or about 95% identical over a specified region.
• the identity can exist over a region that is at least about 75-100 nucleic acids in length, over a region that is about 50 nucleic acids in length, or, where not specified, across the entire sequence of a polynucleotide sequence.
• sequence comparison typically one sequence acts as a reference sequence, to which test sequences are compared.
• test and reference sequences are entered into a computer, subsequence coordinates are designated, if necessary, and sequence algorithm program parameters are designated. Default program parameters can be used, or alternative parameters can be designated.
• the sequence comparison algorithm then calculates the percent sequence identities for the test sequences relative to the reference sequence, based on the program parameters.
• immunogenicity refers to an antibody response to administration of a therapeutic drug.
• the immunogenicity toward therapeutic non-natural amino acid polypeptides can be obtained using quantitative and qualitative assays for detection of anti-non-natural amino acid polypeptides antibodies in biological fluids.
• assays include, but are not limited to, Radioimmunoassay (RIA), Enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), luminescent immunoassay (LIA), and fluorescent immunoassay (FIA).
• RIA Radioimmunoassay
• ELISA Enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
• LIA luminescent immunoassay
• FIA fluorescent immunoassay
• intercalating agent also referred to as “intercalating group,” as used herein, refers to a chemical that can insert into the intramolecular space of a molecule or the intermoiecular space between molecules.
• an intercalating agent or group is a molecule which inserts into the stacked bases of the DNA double helix.
• isolated refers to separating and removing a component of interest from components not of interest. Isolated substances can be in either a dry or semi-dry state, or in solution, including but not limited to an aqueous solution.
• the isolated component can be in a homogeneous state or the isolated component can be a part of a pharmaceutical composition that comprises additional pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and/or excipients. Purity and homogeneity are determined using analytical chemistry techniques including, but not limited to, polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or high performance liquid chromatography. In addition, when a component of interest is isolated and is the predominant species present in a preparation, the component is described herein as substantially purified.
• nucleic acids or proteins are “isolated” when such nucleic acids or proteins are free of at least some of the cellular components with which it is associated in the natural state, or that the nucleic acid or protein has been concentrated to a level greater than the concentration of its in vivo or in vitro production.
• a gene is isolated when separated from open reading frames which flank the gene and encode a protein other than the gene of interest.
• label refers to a substance, which is incorporated into a compound and is readily detected, whereby its physical distribution is optionally detected and/or monitored.
• linkages as used herein to refer to bonds or chemical moiety formed from a chemical reaction between the functional group of a linker and another molecule. Such bonds include, but are not limited to, covalent linkages and non-covalent bonds, while such chemical moieties include, but are not limited to, esters, carbonates, imines phosphate esters, hydrazones, acetals, orthoesters, peptide linkages, and oligonucleotide linkages.
• Hydrolytically stable linkages means that the linkages are substantially stable in water and do not react with water at useful pH values, including but not limited to, under physiological conditions for an extended period of time, perhaps even indefinitely.
• Hydrolytically unstable or degradable linkages means that the linkages are degradable in water or in aqueous solutions, including for example, blood.
• Enzymatically unstable or degradable linkages means that the linkage can be degraded by one or more enzymes.
• PEG and related polymers include degradable linkages in the polymer backbone or in the linker group between the polymer backbone and one or more of the terminal functional groups of the polymer molecule.
• Such degradable linkages include, but are not limited to, ester linkages formed by the reaction of PEG carboxylic acids or activated PEG carboxylic acids with alcohol groups on a biologically active agent, wherein such ester groups generally hydrolyze under physiological conditions to release the biologically active agent.
• hydrolytically degradable linkages include but are not limited to carbonate linkages; imine linkages resulted from reaction of an amine and an aldehyde; phosphate ester linkages formed by reacting an alcohol with a phosphate group; hydrazone linkages which are reaction product of a hydrazide and an aldehyde; acetal linkages that are the reaction product of an aldehyde and an alcohol; orthoester linkages that are the reaction product of a formate and an alcohol; peptide linkages formed by an amine group, including but not limited to, at an end of a polymer such as PEG, and a carboxyl group of a peptide; and oligonucleotide linkages formed by a phosphoramidite group, including but not limited to, at the end of a polymer, and a 5' hydroxyl group of an oligonucleotide.
• medium refers to any culture medium used to grow and harvest cells and/or products expressed and/or secreted by such cells.
• Such “medium” or “media” include, but are not limited to, solution, solid, semi-solid, or rigid supports that support or contain any host cell, including, by way of example, bacterial host cells,- yeast host cells, insect host cells, plant host cells, eukaryotic host cells, mammalian host cells, CHO cells, prokaryotic host cells, E. coli, or Pseudomonas host cells, and cell contents.
• Such “medium” or “media” includes, but is not limited to, medium or media in which the host cell has been grown into which a polypeptide has been secreted, including medium either before or after a proliferation step.
• Such “medium” or “media” also includes, but is not limited to, buffers or reagents that contain host cell lysates, by way of example a polypeptide produced intracellularly and the host cells are lysed or disrupted to release the polypeptide.
• metabolite refers to a derivative of a compound, by way of example natural amino acid polypeptide, a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, a modified natural amino acid polypeptide, or a modified non-natural amino acid polypeptide, that is formed when the compound, by way of example natural amino acid polypeptide, non-natural amino acid polypeptide, modified natural amino acid polypeptide, or modified non-natural amino acid polypeptide, is metabolized.
• pharmaceutically active metabolite refers to a biologically active derivative of a compound, by way of example natural amino acid polypeptide, a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, a modified natural amino acid polypeptide, or a modified non-natural amino acid polypeptide, that is formed when such a compound, by way of example a natural amino acid polypeptide, non-natural amino acid polypeptide, modified natural amino acid polypeptide, or modified non-natural amino acid polypeptide, is metabolized.
• the term "metabolized,” as used herein, refers to the sum of the processes by which a particular substance is changed by an organism. Such processes include, but are not limited to, hydrolysis reactions and reactions catalyzed by enzymes. Further information on metabolism is obtained from The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 9th Edition, McGraw-Hill (1996).
• metabolites of natural amino acid polypeptides, non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified natural amino acid polypeptides, or modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides are identified either by administration of the natural amino acid polypeptides, non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified natural amino acid polypeptides, or modified non- natural amino acid polypeptides to a host and analysis of tissue samples from the host, or by incubation of natural amino acid polypeptides, non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified natural amino acid polypeptides, or modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides with hepatic cells in vitro and analysis of the resulting compounds.
• metal chelator refers to a molecule which forms a metal complex with metal ions. By way of example, such molecules form two or more coordination bonds with a central metal ion and form ring structures.
• metal-containing moiety refers to a group which contains a metal ion, atom or particle.
• moieties include, but are not limited to, cisplatin, chelated metals ions (such as nickel, iron, and platinum), and metal nanoparticles (such as nickel, iron, and platinum).
• the terra "moiety incorporating a heavy atom,” as used herein, refers to a group which incorporates an ion of atom which is usually heavier than carbon.
• Such ions or atoms include, but are not limited to, silicon, tungsten, gold, lead, and uranium.
• modified refers to the presence of a change to a natural amino acid, a non- natural amino acid, a natural amino acid polypeptide or a non-natural amino acid polypeptide. Such changes, or modifications, are optionally obtained by post synthesis modifications of natural amino acids, non-natural amino acids, natural amino acid polypeptides or non-natural amino acid polypeptides, or by co-translational, or by post-translational modification of natural amino acids, non-natural amino acids, natural amino acid polypeptides or non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• modified or unmodified means that the natural amino acid, non-natural amino acid, natural amino acid polypeptide or non-natural amino acid polypeptide being discussed are optionally modified, that is, he natural amino acid, non-natural amino acid, natural amino acid polypeptide or non-natural amino acid polypeptide under discussion can be modified or unmodified.
• the term "modulated serum half-life” refers to positive or negative changes in the circulating half-life of a modified biologically active molecule relative to its non-modified form.
• the modified biologically active molecules include, but are not limited to, natural amino acid, non- natural amino acid, natural amino acid polypeptide or non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• serum half-life is measured by taking blood samples at various time points after administration of the biologically active molecule or modified biologically active molecule, and determining the concentration of that molecule in each sample. Correlation of the serum concentration with tune allows calculation of the serum half- life.
• modulated serum half-life is an increased in serum half-life, which enables an improved dosing regimens or avoid toxic effects. Such increases in serum are at least about two fold, at least about three-fold, at least about five-fold, or at least about ten-fold. This method is optionally used for evaluating the serum half-life of any polypeptide.
• modulated therapeutic half-life refers to positive or negative change in the half-life of the therapeutically effective amount of a modified biologically active molecule, relative to its non- modified form.
• the modified biologically active molecules include, but are not limited to, natural amino acid, nou-natural amino acid, natural amino acid polypeptide or non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• therapeutic half-life is measured by measuring pharmacokinetic and/or pharmacodynamic properties of the molecule at various time points after administration.
• Increased therapeutic half-life optionally enable a particular beneficial dosing regimen, a particular beneficial total dose, or avoids an undesired effect.
• the increased therapeutic half-life results from increased potency, increased or decreased binding of the modified molecule to its target, an increase or decrease in another parameter or mechanism of action of the non-modified molecule, or an increased or decreased breakdown of the molecules by enzymes such as, by way of example only, proteases. This method is used for evaluating the therapeutic half-life of any polypeptide.
• nanoparticle refers to a particle which has a particle size between about 500 nm to about 1 nm.
• non-eukaryote refers to non-eukaryotic organisms.
• a non-eukaryotic organism belongs to the Eubacteria, (which includes but is not limited to, Escherichia coli, Thermus thermophilus, or Bacillus stearothermophilus, Pseudomonas fluorescens, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Pseudomonas putida), phylogenetic domain, or the Archaea, which includes, but is not limited to, Methanococcus jannaschii, Methanobacterium thermoautotrophicum, Archaeoglobus fulgidus, Pyrococcus furiosus, Pyrococcus horikoshii, Aeuropyrum pernix, or Halobacterium such as Haloferax volcanii and Halobacterium species NRC-I, or phylogenetic domain.
• Eubacteria which includes but is not limited to, Escherichia coli, Thermus thermophilus, or Bacillus stearothermophilus, P
• non-natural amino acid refers to an amino acid that is not one of the 20 common amino acids or pyrolysine or selenocysteine.
• Other synonymous terms are "non-naturally encoded amino acid,” “unnatural amino acid,” “non-natural ly-occurring amino acid.” and variously hyphenated and non-hyphenated versions thereof.
• non-natural amino acid includes, but is not limited to, amino acids which occur naturally by modification of a naturally encoded amino acid (including but not limited to, the 20 common amino acids or pyrrolysine and selenocysteine) but are not themselves incorporated into a growing polypeptide chain by the translation complex.
• Naturally-occurring amino acids that are not naturally-encoded include, but are not limited to, N-acetylglucosaminyl-L-serine, N-acetylglucosaminyl-L-threonine, and O-phosphotyrosine.
• non-natural amino acid includes, but is not limited to. amino acids which do not occur naturally and are obtained synthetically or are obtained by modification of non-natural amino acids.
• nucleic acid refers to deoxyribonucleotides, deoxyribonucleosides, ribonucleosides or ribonucleotides and polymers thereof in either single- or double-stranded form.
• nucleic acids and nucleic acid polymers include, but are not limited to, (i) analogues of natural nucleotides which have similar binding properties as a reference nucleic acid and are metabolized in a manner similar to naturally occurring nucleotides; (ii) oligonucleotide analogs including, but are not limited to, PNA (peptidonucleic acid), analogs of DNA used in antisense technology (phosphorothioates, phosphoroamidates, and the like); (iii) conservatively modified variants thereof (including but not limited to, degenerate codon substitutions) and complementary sequences and sequence explicitly indicated.
• PNA peptidonucleic acid
• analogs of DNA used in antisense technology phosphorothioates, phosphoroamidates, and the like
• conservatively modified variants thereof including but not limited to, degenerate codon substitutions
• degenerate codon substitutions are achieved by generating sequences in which the third position of one or more selected (or all) codons is substituted with mixed-base and/or deoxyinosine residues (Batzer et al., Nucleic Acid Res. 19:5081 (1991); Ohtsuka et al., J. Biol. Chem. 260:2605-2608 ( 1985); and Rossolini et al., MoI. Cell. Probes 8:91-98 (1994)).
• oxidizing agent refers to a compound or material which removes an electron from a compound being oxidized.
• oxidizing agents include, but are not limited to, oxidized glutathione, cystine, cystamine, oxidized dithiothreitol, oxidized erythreitol, and oxygen.
• oxidizing agents are suitable for use in the methods and compositions described herein.
• pharmaceutically acceptable refers to a material, including but not limited, to a salt, carrier or diluent, which does not abrogate the biological activity or properties of the compound, and is relatively nontoxic, i.e., the material is administered to an individual without causing undesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious manner with any of the components of the composition in which it is contained.
• photoaffinity label refers to a label with a group, which, upon exposure to light, forms a linkage with a molecule for which the label has an affinity. By way of example only, such a linkage is covalent or non-covalent.
• photocaged moiety refers to a group which, upon illumination at certain wavelengths, covalently or non-covalently binds other ions or molecules.
• photocleavable group refers to a group which breaks upon exposure to light.
• photocrosslinker refers to a compound comprising two or more functional groups which, upon exposure to light, are reactive and form a covalent or non-covalent linkage with two or more monomelic or polymeric molecules.
• polyalkylene glycol refers to linear or branched polymeric polyether polyols. Such polyalkylene glycols, including, but are not limited to, polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, polybutylene glycol, and derivatives thereof. Other exemplary embodiments are listed, for example, in commercial supplier catalogs, such as Shearwater Corporation's catalog “Polyethylene Glycol and Derivatives for Biomedical Applications” (2001). By way of example only, such polymeric polyether polyols have average molecular weights within a desired polymer molecular weight range.
• the term "within a desired polymer molecular weight range,” as used herein means between about 0.1 kDa to about 100 kDa. By way of example, between about 100 Da and about 100,000 Da or more.
• the molecular weight of the polymer is between, for example, about 100 Da and about 100,000 Da, including but not limited to, 100,000 Da, 95,000 Da, 90,000 Da, 85,000 Da, 80,000 Da, 75,000 Da, 70,000 Da, 65,000 Da, 60,000 Da, 55,000 Da, 50,000 Da, 45,000 Da, 40,000 Da, 35,000 Da, 30,000 Da, 25,000 Da, 20,000 Da 1 15,000 Da, 10,000 Da, 9,000 Da, 8,000 Da, 7,000 Da, 6,000 Da, 5,000 Da, 5,000 Da, 4,000 Da, 3,000 Da, 2,000 Da, 1,000 Da, 900 Da, 800 Da, 700 Da, 600 Da, 500 Da, 400 Da, 300 Da, 200 Da, and 100 Da.
• the molecular weight of the polymer is between about 100 Da and about 50,000 Da. In some embodiments, the molecular weight of the polymer is between about 100 Da and about 40,000 Da. In some embodiments, the molecular weight of the polymer is between about 1 ,000 Da and about 40,000 Da. In some embodiments, the molecular weight of the polymer is between about 5,000 Da and about 40,000 Da. In some embodiments, the molecular weight of the polymer is between about 10,000 Da and about 40,000 Da. In some embodiments, the polymer molecule is a branched polymer.
• the molecular weight of the branched chain polymer is between, for example, about 1,000 Da and about 100,000 Da, including but not limited to, 100,000 Da, 95,000 Da, 90,000 Da, 85,000 Da, 80,000 Da, 75,000 Da, 70,000 Da, 65,000 Da, 60,000 Da, 55,000 Da, 50,000 Da, 45,000 Da, 40,000 Da, 35,000 Da, 30,000 Da, 25,000 Da, 20,000 Da, 15,000 Da, 10,000 Da, 9,000 Da, 8,000 Da, 7,000 Da, 6,000 Da, 5,000 Da, 5,000 Da, 4,000 Da, 3,000 Da, 2,000 Da, and 1,000 Da. In some embodiments, the molecular weight of the branched chain polymer is between about 1,000 Da and about 50,000 Da.
• the molecular weight of the branched chain polymer is between about 1 ,000 Da and about 40,000 Da. In some embodiments, the molecular weight of the branched chain polymer is between about 5,000 Da and about 40,000 Da. In some embodiments, the molecular weight of the branched chain polymer is between about 5,000 Da and about 20,000 Da.
• polymer refers to a molecule composed of repeated subunits. Such molecules include, but are not limited to, polypeptides, polynucleotides, or polysaccharides or polyalkylene glycols.
• polypeptide refers to a polymer of amino acid residues. That is, a description directed to a polypeptide applies equally to a description of a peptide and a description of a protein, and vice versa. The terms apply to naturally occurring amino acid polymers as well as amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residues is a non-natural amino acid.
• polypeptides include amino acid chains of any length, including full length proteins, wherein the amino acid residues are linked by covalent peptide bonds.
• The term “post-translationally modified” refers to any modification of a natural or non-natural amino acid which occurs after such an amino acid has been translationally incorporated into a polypeptide chain. Such modifications include, but are not limited to, co-translational in vivo modifications, co-translational in vitro modifications (such as in a cell-free translation system), post-translational in vivo modifications, and post- translational in vitro modifications.
• prodrug or “pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug,” as used herein, refers to an agent that is converted into the parent drug in vivo or in vitro, wherein which does not abrogate the biological activity or properties of the drug, and is relatively nontoxic, i.e., the material is administered to an individual without causing undesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious manner with any of the components of the composition in which it is contained.
• Prodrugs are generally drug precursors that, following administration to a subject and subsequent absorption, are converted to an active, or a more active species via some process, such as conversion by a metabolic pathway.
• Some prodrugs have a chemical group present on the prodrug that renders it less active and/or confers solubility or some other property to the drug. Once the chemical group has been cleaved and/or modified from the prodrug the active drug is generated. Prodrugs are converted into active drug within the body through enzymatic or non-enzymatic reactions. Prodrugs, for example, provide improved physiochemical properties such as better solubility, enhanced delivery characteristics, such as specifically targeting a particular cell, tissue, organ or ligand, and improved therapeutic value of the drug.
• prodrugs include, but are not limited to, (i) ease of administration compared with the parent drug; (ii) the prodrug is bioavailable by oral administration whereas the parent is not; and (iii) the prodrug has improved solubility in pharmaceutical compositions compared with the parent drug.
• a pro-drug includes a pharmacologically inactive, or reduced-activity, derivative of an active drag.
• Prodrugs are designed, for example, to modulate the amount of a drug or biologically active molecule that reaches a desired site of action through the manipulation of the properties of a drug, such as physiochemical, biopharmaceutical, or pharmacokinetic properties.
• prodrug a non-natural amino acid polypeptide which is administered as an ester (the "prodrug") to facilitate transmittal across a cell membrane where water solubility is detrimental to mobility but which then is metabolically hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid, the active entity, once inside the cell where water-solubility is beneficial.
• Prodrugs are also designed, for example, as reversible drug derivatives, for use as modifiers to enhance drug transport to site-specific tissues.
• prophylactically effective amount refers that amount of a composition containing at least one non-natural amino acid polypeptide or at least one modified non-natural amino acid polypeptide prophylactically applied to a patient which will relieve to some extent one or more of the symptoms of a disease, condition or disorder being treated. In such prophylactic applications, such amounts depend, for example, on the patient's state of health, weight, and the like.
• protected refers to the presence of a “protecting group” or moiety that prevents reaction of the chemically reactive functional group under certain reaction conditions. The protecting group will vary depending on the type of chemically reactive group being protected.
• the protecting group is selected from tert- butyloxycarbonyl (t-Boc) and 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc); (ii) if the chemically reactive group is a thiol, the protecting group is orthopyridyldisulfide; and (iii) if the chemically reactive group is a carboxylic acid, such as butanoic or propionic acid, or a hydroxyl group, the. protecting group is benzyl or an alkyl group such as methyl, ethyl, or tett-butyl. 100142] By way of example only, blocking/protecting groups are selected from:
• protecting groups include, but are not limited to, including photolabile groups such as
• radioactive moiety refers to a group whose nuclei spontaneously give off nuclear radiation, such as alpha, beta, or gamma particles; wherein, alpha particles are helium nuclei, beta particles are electrons, and gamma particles are high energy photons.
• exogenous polynucleotide is a nonintegrated vector, including but not limited to a plasmid, or is integrated into the host genome.
• redox-active agent refers to a molecule which oxidizes or reduces another molecule, whereby the redox active agent becomes reduced or oxidized.
• redox active agent include, but are not limited to, ferrocene, quinones, Ru 2* ' 3* complexes, Co 2+/3+ complexes, and Os 21 ' 34 complexes.
• reducing agent refers to a compound or material which is capable of adding an electron to a compound being reduced.
• reducing agents include, but are not limited to, dithiothreitol (DTT), 2-mercaptoethanol, dithioerythritol, cysteine, cysteamine (2-aminoethanethiol), and reduced glutathione.
• DTT dithiothreitol
• 2-mercaptoethanol 2-mercaptoethanol
• dithioerythritol cysteine
• cysteamine (2-aminoethanethiol
• reduced glutathione reduced glutathione
• the term "resin,” as used herein, refers to high molecular weight, insoluble polymer beads. By way of example only, such beads are used as supports for solid phase peptide synthesis, or sites for attachment of molecules prior to purification.
• saccharide refers to a series of carbohydrates including but not limited to sugars, monosaccharides, oligosaccharides, and polysaccharides.
• safety refers to side effects that are related to administration of a drug relative to the number of times the drug has been administered.
• a drug which has been administered many times and produced only mild or. no side effects is said to have an excellent safety profile. This method is used, for example, for evaluating the safety profile of any polypeptide.
• ser label refers to molecules which contain an atom or a group of atoms exhibiting an unpaired electron spin (i.e. a stable paramagnetic group) that can be detected by electron spin resonance spectroscopy and can be attached to another molecule.
• spin-label molecules include, but are not limited to, nitryl radicals and nitroxides, and are single spin-labels or double spin-labels.
• ratio of the moles of compounds participating in a chemical reaction being about 0.9 to about 1.1.
• the term "stoichiometric-like,” as used herein, refers to a chemical reaction which becomes stoichiometric or near-stoichiometric upon changes in reaction conditions or in the presence of additives. Such changes in reaction conditions include, but are not limited to, an increase in temperature or change in pH. Such additives include, but are not limited to, accelerants.
• the term "subject” as used herein, refers to an animal which is the object of treatment, observation or experiment. By way of example only, a subject is, but is not limited to, a mammal including, but not limited to, a human.
• substantially purified refers to a component of interest that is substantially or essentially free of other components which normally accompany or interact with the component of interest prior to purification.
• a component of interest is “substantially purified” when the preparation of the component of interest contains less than about 30%, less than about 25%, less than about 20%, less than about 15%, less than about 10%, less than about 5%, less than about 4%, less than about 3%, less than about 2%, or less than about 1% (by dry weight) of contaminating components.
• a “substantially purified” component of interest has a purity level of about 70%, about 75%, about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, about 96%, about 97%, about 98%, about 99% or greater.
• a natural amino acid polypeptide or a non-natural amino acid polypeptide is purified from a native cell, or host cell in the case of recombinantly produced natural amino acid polypeptides or non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• a preparation of a natural amino acid polypeptide or a non-natural amino acid polypeptide is "substantially purified” when the preparation contains less than about 30%, less than about 25%, less than about 20%, less than about 15%, less than about 10%, less than about 5%, less than about 4%, less than about 3%, less than about 2%, or less than about 1% (by dry weight) of contaminating material.
• the natural amino acid polypeptide or non-natural amino acid polypeptide is present at about 30%, about 25%, about 20%, about 15%, about 10%, about 5%, about 4%, about 3%, about 2%, or about 1% or less of the dry weight of the cells.
• the natural amino acid polypeptide or non-natural amino acid polypeptide is present in the culture medium at about 5g/L, about 4g/L, about 3g/L, about 2g/L, about lg/L, about 750mg/L, about 500mg/L, about 250mg/L, about 100mg/L, about 50mg/L, about 10mg/L, or about lmg/L or less of the dry weight of the cells.
• substantially purified natural amino acid polypeptides or non-natural amino acid polypeptides has a purity level of about 30%, about 35%, about 40%, about 45%, about 50%, about 55%, about 60%, about 65%, about 70%, about 75%, about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, about 99% or greater as determined by appropriate methods, including, but not limited to, SDS/PAGE analysis, RP-HPLC, SEC, and capillary electrophoresis.
• substituted substifuents also referred to as “non-interfering substifuents” "refers to groups which are used to replace another group on a molecule. Such groups include, but are not limited to, halo, Ci-C 10 alkyl, C 2 - Cio alkenyl, C 2 -C 10 alkynyl, C 1 -C 10 alkoxy, C 5 -Ci 2 aralkyl, C 3 -Ci 2 cycloalkyl, C 4 -C 12 cycloalkenyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, toluolyl, xylenyl, biphenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkoxyalkyl, C 5 -C 12 alkoxyaryl, C 5 -C 12 aryloxyalkyl, C 7 - C
• R group in the preceding list includes, but is not limited to, H, alkyl or substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl, or alkaryl.
• substituent groups are specified by their conventional chemical formulas, written from left to right, they equally encompass the chemically identical substituents that would result from writing the structure from right to left; for example, -CH 2 O- is equivalent to -OCH 2 -.
• Each R group in the preceding list includes, but is not limited to, hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, including but not limited to, aryl substituted with 1 or 2 halogens, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkoxy groups, or aralkyl groups.
• -NR 2 is meant to include, but not be limited to, 1 -pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl.
• therapeutic protein refers to any one or all of the following polypeptides/proteins: alpha- 1 antitrypsin, angiostatin, antihemolytic factor, antibody, antibody fragment, apolipoprotein, apoprotein, atrial natriuretic factor, atrial natriuretic polypeptide, atrial peptide, C-X-C chemokine, T39765, NAP-2, ENA-78, gro-a, gro-b, gro-c, IP-10, GCP-2, NAP -4, SDF-I, PF4, MIG.
• terO0161J refers to the amount of a composition containing at least one non-natural amino acid polypeptide and/or at least one modified non-natural amino acid polypeptide administered to a patient already suffering from a disease, condition or disorder, sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest, or relieve to some extent one or more of the symptoms of the disease, disorder or condition being treated.
• the effectiveness of such compositions depend conditions including, but not limited to, the severity and course of the disease, disorder or condition, previous therapy, the patient's health status and response to the drugs, and the judgment of the treating physician.
• therapeutically effective amounts are determined by methods, including but not limited to a dose escalation clinical trial.
• thioalkoxy refers to sulfur containing alkyl groups linked to molecules via an oxygen atom.
• thermo melting point is the temperature (under defined ionic strength, pH, and nucleic concentration) at which 50% of probes complementary to a target hybridize to the target sequence at equilibrium.
• the terms "treat,” “treating” or “treatment”, as used herein, include alleviating, abating or ameliorating a disease or condition symptoms, preventing additional symptoms, ameliorating or preventing the underlying metabolic causes of symptoms, inhibiting the disease or condition, e.g., arresting the development of the disease or condition, relieving the disease or condition, causing regression of. the disease or condition, relieving a condition caused by the disease or condition, or stopping the symptoms of the disease or condition.
• the terms “treat,” “treating” or “treatment”, include, but are not limited to, prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatments.
• water soluble polymer refers to any polymer that is soluble in aqueous solvents.
• water soluble polymers include, but are not limited to, polyethylene glycol, polyethylene glycol propionaldchyde, mono Ci-Ci 0 alkoxy or aryloxy derivatives thereof (described in U.S. Patent No.
• water soluble polymers By way of example only, coupling of such water soluble polymers to natural amino acid polypeptides or non- natural polypeptides results in changes including, but not limited to, increased water solubility, increased or modulated serum half-life, increased or modulated therapeutic half-life relative to the unmodified form, increased bioavailability, modulated biological activity, extended circulation time, modulated immunogenicity, modulated physical association characteristics including, but not limited to, aggregation and multimer formation, altered receptor binding, altered binding to one or more binding partners, and altered receptor dimerization or multimerization.
• such water soluble polymers optionally have their own biological activity.
• isotopes examples include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 13 C, 14 C 1 15 N, 18 O, ' 7 O, 35 S, ' 8 F, 36 Cl, respectively.
• isotopically-labeled compounds described herein for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as 3 H and 14 C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution assays.
• substitution with isotopes such as deuterium, i.e., 2 H, can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements.
• Some of the compounds herein (including, but not limited to non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides, and reagents for producing the aforementioned compounds) have asymmetric carbon atoms and can therefore exist as enantiomers or diastereomers. Diasteromeric mixtures can be separated into their individual diastereomers on the basis of their physical chemical differences by documented methodologies, for example, by chromatography and/or fractional crystallization.
• Enantiomers can be separated by converting the enantiomeric mixture into a diastereomeric mixture by reaction with an appropriate optically active compound (e.g., alcohol), separating the diastereomers and converting (e.g., hydrolyzing) the individual diastereomers to the corresponding pure enantiomers. All such isomers, including diastereomers, enantiomers, and mixtures thereof are considered as part of the compositions described herein.
• the compounds described herein including, but not limited to non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides, and reagents for producing the aforementioned compounds
• pro-drugs are used in the form of pro-drugs.
• the compounds described herein are metabolized upon administration to an organism in need to produce a metabolite that is then used to produce a desired effect, including a desired therapeutic effect.
• a desired effect including a desired therapeutic effect.
• the methods and formulations described herein include the use of N-oxides, crystalline forms (also known as polymorphs), or pharmaceutically acceptable salts of non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• the non-natural amino acids, non- natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein can exist in unsolvated as well as solvated forms with pharmaceutically acceptable solvents such as water, ethanol, and the like.
• the solvated forms of the non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non- natural amino acid polypeptides presented herein are also considered to be disclosed herein.
• Some of the compounds herein may exist in several tautomeric forms. All such tautomeric forms are considered as part of the compositions described herein. Also, for example all enol-keto forms of any compounds (including, but not limited to non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides and reagents for producing the aforementioned compounds) herein are considered as part of the compositions described herein.
• Some of the compounds herein are acidic and form a salt with a pharmaceutically acceptable cation. Some of the compounds herein (including, but not limited to non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides and reagents for producing the aforementioned compounds) are basic and accordingly, form a salt with a pharmaceutically acceptable anion. All such salts, including di-salts are within the scope of the compositions described herein and are prepared by documented methodologies.
• salts are optionally prepared by contacting the acidic and basic entities, in either an aqueous, non-aqueous or partially aqueous medium.
• the salts are recovered by using at least one of the following techniques: filtration, precipitation with a non-solvent followed by filtration, evaporation of the solvent, or, in the case of aqueous solutions, lyophilization.
• salts of the non-natural amino acid polypeptides disclosed herein are optionally formed when an acidic proton present in the parent non-natural amino acid polypeptides either is replaced by a metal ion, by way of example an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth ion, or an aluminum ion; or coordinates with an organic base.
• a metal ion by way of example an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth ion, or an aluminum ion; or coordinates with an organic base.
• the salt forms of the disclosed non-natural amino acid polypeptides are optionally prepared using salts of the starting materials or intermediates.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein are optionally prepared as a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt (which is a type of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt) by reacting the free base form of non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein with a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic acid.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein are prepared as pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts (which are a type of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt) by reacting the free acid form of non- natural amino acid polypeptides described herein with a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic base.
• the type of pharmaceutical acceptable salts include, but are not limited to: (1) acid addition salts, formed with inorganic acids- such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like; or formed with organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumarie acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 1 ,2-ethanedisulfonic acid, 2- hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, 4-methylbicyclo-[2.2.2]
• Acceptable organic bases include ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, tromethamine, N-methylglucamine, and the like.
• Acceptable inorganic bases include aluminum hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, and the like.
• The corresponding counterions of the non-natural amino acid polypeptide pharmaceutical acceptable salts are analyzed and identified using various methods including, but not limited to, ion exchange chromatography, ion chromatography, capillary electrophoresis, inductively coupled plasma, atomic absorption spectroscopy, mass spectrometry, or any combination thereof. In addition, the therapeutic activity of such non- natural amino acid polypeptide pharmaceutical acceptable salts are tested using the techniques and methods described in examples 9-17.
• a reference to a salt includes the solvent addition forms or crystal forms thereof, particularly solvates or polymorphs.
• Solvates contain either stoichiometric or non-stoichiomerric amounts of a solvent, and are often formed during the process of crystallization with pharmaceutically acceptable solvents such as water, ethanol, and the like. Hydrates are formed when the solvent is water, or alcoholates arc formed when the solvent is alcohol.
• Polymorphs include the different crystal packing arrangements of the same elemental composition of a compound. Polymorphs usually have different X-ray diffraction patterns, infrared spectra, melting points, density, hardness, crystal shape, optical and electrical properties, stability, and solubility.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptide pharmaceutical acceptable salts polymorphs and/or solvates is accomplished using a variety of techniques including, but not limited to, thermal analysis, x-ray diffraction, spectroscopy, vapor sorption, and microscopy.
• Thermal analysis methods address thermo chemical degradation or thermo physical processes including, but not limited to, polymorphic transitions, and such methods are used to analyze the relationships between polymorphic forms, determine weight loss, to find the glass transition temperature, or for excipient compatibility studies.
• Such methods include, but are not limited to, Differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), Modulated Differential Scanning Calorimetry (MDCS), Thermogravirnetric analysis (TGA), and Thermogravi-metric and Infrared analysis (TG/IR).
• DSC Differential scanning calorimetry
• MDCS Modulated Differential Scanning Calorimetry
• TGA Thermogravirnetric analysis
• TG/IR Thermogravi-metric and Infrared analysis
• X-ray diffraction methods include, but are not limited to, single crystal and powder diffractometers and synchrotron sources.
• the various spectroscopic techniques used include, but are not limited to, Raman, FTIR, UVIS, and NMR (liquid and solid state).
• the various microscopy techniques include, but are not limited to, polarized light microscopy, Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) with Energy Dispersive X-Ray Analysis (EDX), Environmental Scanning Electron Microscopy with EDX (in gas or water vapor atmosphere), IR microscopy, and Raman microscopy.
• FIG. 1 presents a non-limiting schematic representation of the relationship of certain aspects of the methods, compositions, strategies and techniques described herein.
• FIG. 2 presents a non limiting schematic representation of the mechanism of Fischer indole synthesis.
• FIG. 3 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the synthetic methodology used to make the non- natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 4 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the synthetic methodology used to make the non- natural amino acids described herein.
• FlG. 5 presents an illustrative, non-limiting example of the synthetic methodology used to make the non-natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 6 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the synthetic methodology used to make the non- natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 7 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the synthetic methodology used to make the non- natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 8 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the synthetic methodology used to make the non- natural amino acids described herein.
• FlG. 9 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the synthetic methodology used to make the non- natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 10 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the synthetic methodology used to make the non-natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 11 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the synthetic methodology used to make the non-natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 12 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the effect of metal ion on the Fisher indole synthesis.
• FlG. 13 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the accelerating effect of nickel metal ion on the synthetic methodology used to make the non-natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 14 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the effect of the solvent on the synthetic methodology used to make the non-natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 15 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid reagents used in the synthesis of indole-containing non-amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 16 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of carbonyl-containing and masked carbonyl- containing non-natural amino acid reagents used in the synthesis of indole-containing non-natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 17 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of carbonyl-containing and masked carbonyl- containing non-natural amino acid reagents used in the synthesis of indole-containing non-natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 18 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid reagents used in the synthesis of indole-containing non-natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 18 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid reagents used in the synthesis of indole-containing non-natural amino acids described herein.
• FIG. 19 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the post-translational modification of carbonyl- containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides with hydrazine-containing reagents to form modifed indole- containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• FIG. 20 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the post-translational modification of hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides with carbonyl-containing reagents to form modifed indole-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• FIG. 21 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of carbonyl-containing and masked carbonyl- containing proteins labeling or modification with hydrazine-containing reagents to form indole-containing non- natural amino acid proteins.
• FIG. 22 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of hydrazine-containing proteins labeling or modification with carbonyl-containing reagents to form indole-containing non-natural amino acid proteins.
• Fig. 23 presents illustrative, non-limiting examples of (A) the modification of non-natural amino acid polypeptides by chemical conversion into carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides and (B) the modification of non-natural amino acid polypeptides by chemical conversion into hydrazine-containing non- natural amino acid polypeptides.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides are used in or incorporated into any of the methods, compositions, techniques and strategies for making, purifying, characterizing, and using non- natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein.
• FIG. 24A represents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the modification of hydrazine and carbonyl non-natural amino acid containing polypeptides or proteins to introduce the desired functionality.
• Such non-natural amino acid polypeptides are used in or incorporated into any of the methods, compositions, techniques and strategies for making, purifying, characterizing, and using non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein.
• FIG. 24B represents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the reaction of functional group containing polypeptides or proteins with PEG derivatives.
• FIG. 25 presents an illustrative, non-limiting representation of the use of a bifunctional linker group to link protein or polypeptide containing non-natural amino acid with PEG derivatives through the formation of indole.
• FIG. 26 presents an illustrative, non-limiting examples of the the synthesis a bifunctional linker group containing hydrazine at both ends.
• FIG. 27 presents an illustrative, non-limiting example of the use of a bifunctional linker to form a homodimer of two non-natural amino acids polypeptides.
• FIG. 28 represents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the reaction between branched PEG containing reagents and carbonyl non-natural amino acid containing polypeptides to form indole modified polypeptides.
• Such non-natural amino acid polypeptides are used in or incorporated into any of the methods, compositions, techniques and strategies for making, purifying, characterizing, and using non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein. [00209
• FIG. 29 represents illustrative, non-limiting examples of the reaction between branched PEG containing reagents and hydrazine non-natural amino acid containing polypeptides to form indole modified polypeptides.
• Such non-natural amino acid polypeptides are used in or incorporated into any of the methods, compositions, techniques and strategies for making, purifying, characterizing, and using non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein.
• FlG. 30 represents illustrative, non-limiting examples of PEG derivatives containing hydrazine and carbonyl groups.
• FIG. 1 is a non-limiting example of the compositions, methods, techniques and strategies that are described herein.
• the tools for creating and using a polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid or modified non-natural amino acid with a carbonyl, hydrazine, or heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle group.
• the carbonyl group includes, but is not limted to, ketones or aldehydes,.
• Such non-natural amino acids optionally contain further functionality, including but not limited to a desired functionality.
• the various aforementioned functionalities are not meant to imply that the members of one functionality can not be classified as members of another functionality. Indeed, there will be overlap depending upon the particular circumstances.
• a water-soluble polymer overlaps in scope with a derivative of polyethylene glycol, however the overlap is not complete and thus both functionalities are cited above.
• the new polypeptide is optionally designed de novo, including by way of example only, as part of high-throughput screening process (in which case numerous polypeptides are designed, synthesized, characterized and/or tested) or based on the interests of the researcher. Alternativly, the new polypeptide is optionally designed based on the structure of a known or partially characterized polypeptide.
• the Growth Hormone Gene Superfamily has been the subject of intense study by the scientific community; in one embodiment, a new polypeptide is designed based on the structure of a member or members of this gene superfamily.
• the principles for selecting which amino acid(s) to substitute and/or modify are described separately herein.
• the choice of which modification to employ is also described herein, and is used to meet the need of the experimenter or end user.
• Such needs include, but are not limited to, manipulating the therapeutic effectiveness of the polypeptide, improving the safety profile of the polypeptide, adjusting the pharmacokinetics, pharmacologies and/or pharmacodynamics of the polypeptide, such as, by way of example only, increasing water solubility, bioavailability, increasing serum half-life, increasing therapeutic half-life, modulating immunogenicity, modulating biological activity, or extending the circulation time.
• modifications include, by way of example only, providing additional functionality to the polypeptide, incorporating a tag, label or detectable signal into the polypeptide, easing the isolation properties of the polypeptide, and any combination of the aforementioned modifications.
• non-natural amino acids that have been or are optionally modified to contain a hydrazine, carbonyl, or heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle group.
• the carbonyl group includes, but is not limted to, ketones, and aldehydes.
• methods for producing, purifying, characterizing and using such non-natural amino acids include methods, strategies and techniques for incorporating at least one such non-natural amino acid into a polypeptide. Also included with this aspect are methods for producing, purifying, characterizing and using such polypeptides containing at least one such non-natural amino acid.
• compositions of and methods for producing, purifying, characterizing and using oligonucleotides that can be used to produce, at least in part, a polypeptide containing at least one non-natural amino acid.
• compositions of and methods for producing, purifying, characterizing and using cells that can express such oligonucleotides that can be used to produce, at least in part, a polypeptide containing at least one non-natural amino acid.
• polypeptides comprising at least one non-natural amino acid or modified non-natural amino acid with a hydrazine, carbonyl, or heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle group are provided and described herein.
• Carbonyl modified non-natural amino acids include, but are not limted to, ketones and aldehydes.
• polypeptides with at least one non-natural amino acid or modified non- natural amino acid with a hydrazine, carbonyl, or heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle group include at least one co-translational or post-translational modification at some position on the polypeptide.
• the carbonyl modified non-natural amino acids further include, but are not limted to, ketones, and aldehydes.
• the co-translational or post-translational modification occurs via the cellular machinery (e.g., glycosylation, acetylation, acylation, lipid-modification, palmitoylation, palmitate addition, phosphorylation, glycolipid-linkage modification, and the like), in many instances, such cellular-machinery-based co-translational or post-translational modifications occur at the naturally occurring amino acid sites on the polypeptide, however, in certain embodiments, the cellular-machinery-based co- translational or post-translational modifications occur on the non-natural amino acid site(s) on the polypeptide.
• the post-translational modification does not utilize the cellular machinery, but the functionality is instead provided by attachment of a molecule (including but not limited to, a desired functionality) comprising a second reactive group to the at least one non-natural amino acid comprising a first reactive group (including but not limited to, non-natural amino acid containing a ketone, an aldehyde, a hydrazine, or a heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, functional group) utilizing chemistry methodology described herein, or others suitable for the particular reactive groups.
• the co-translational or post-translational modification is made in vivo in a eukaryotic cell or in a non-eukaryotic cell.
• the co-translational or post-translational modification is made in vitro not utilizing the cellular machinery. Also included with this aspect are methods for producing, purifying, characterizing and using such polypeptides containing at least one such post-translationally modified non-natural amino acids.
• compositions, strategies and techniques described herein are reagents capable of reacting with a non-natural amino acid (containing either a carbonyl group, a ketone, a kctoaldehyde, a hydrazine, or protected forms thereof) that is part of a polypeptide so as to produce any of the aforementioned post-translational modifications.
• a non-natural amino acid containing either a carbonyl group, a ketone, a kctoaldehyde, a hydrazine, or protected forms thereof
• the resulting post-translationally modified non-natural amino acid will produce at least one indole derivative.
• the resulting modified indole- based non-natural amino acid undergoes subsequent modification reactions.
• the polypeptide includes at least one co-translational or post-translational modification that is made in vivo by one host cell, where the post-translational modification is not normally made by another host cell type.
• the polypeptide includes at least one co-translational or post-translational modification that is made in vivo by a eukaryotic cell, where the co-translational or post- translational modification is not normally made by a non-eukaryotic cell.
• co-translational or post-translational modifications include, but are not limited to, glycosylation, acetylation, acylation, lipid- modification, palmitoylation, palmitate addition, phosphorylation, glycolipid-linkage modification, and the like.
• the co-translational or post-translational modification comprises attachment of an oligosaccharide to an asparagine by a GlcNAc-asparagine linkage (including but not limited to, where the oligosaccharide comprises (GlcNAc-Man)2-Man-GlcNAc-GlcNAc, and the like).
• the co-translational or post-translational modification comprises attachment of an oligosaccharide (including but not limited to, GaI-GaINAc, GaI-GIcNAc, etc.) to a serine or threonine by a GalNAc-serine, a GalNAc-threonine, a GlcNAc-serine, or a GlcNAc-threonine linkage.
• an oligosaccharide including but not limited to, GaI-GaINAc, GaI-GIcNAc, etc.
• secretion signal sequences include, but are not limited to, a prokaryotic secretion signal sequence, a eukaryotic secretion signal sequence, a eukaryotic secretion signal sequence 5 '-optimized for bacterial expression, a novel secretion signal sequence, pectate lyase secretion signal sequence, Or ⁇ p A secretion signal sequence, and a phage secretion signal sequence.
• secretion signal sequences include, but are not limited to, STII (prokaryotic), Fd GUI and M 13 (phage), Bgl2 (yeast), and the signal sequence bla derived from a transposon.
• a protein or polypeptide can comprise a secretion or localization sequence, an epitope tag, a FLAG tag, a polyhistidine tag, a GST fusion, and/or the like. Also included with this aspect are methods for producing, purifying, characterizing and using such polypeptides containing at least one such co-translational or post-translational modification. In other embodiments, the glycosylated non-natural amino acid polypeptide is produced in a non-glycosylated form.
• Such a non-glycosylated form of a glycosylated non-natural amino acid are optionally produced by methods that include chemical or enzymatic removal of oligosaccharide groups from an isolated or substantially purified or unpurified glycosylated non-natural amino acid polypeptide; production of the non-natural amino acid in a host that does not glycosylate such a non-natural amino acid polypeptide (such a host including, prokaryotes or eukaryotes engineered or mutated to not glycosylate such a polypeptide), the introduction of a glycosylation inhibitor into the cell culture medium in which such a non-natural amino acid polypeptide is being produced by a eukaryote that normally would glycosylate such a polypeptide, or a combination of any such methods.
• non-glycosylated forms of normally-glycosylated non-natural amino acid polypeptides by normally-glycosylated is meant a polypeptide that would be glycosylated when produced under conditions in which naturally-occurring polypeptides arc glycosylated).
• non-glycosylated forms of normally-glycosylated non-natural amino acid polypeptides are optionally in an unpurified form, a substantially purified form, or in an isolated form.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide contains, in alternative embodiments, at least one, at least two, at least three, at least four, at least five, at least six, at least seven, at least eight, at least nine, or ten or more non- natural amino acids containing a carbonyl group, a ketone, an aldehyde, a hydrazine, heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle group, or protected forms thereof.
• the non-natural amino acids can be the same or different, for example, there can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or more different sites in the protein that comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 1O 1 11 , 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or more different non-natural amino acids.
• at least one, but fewer than all, of a particular amino acid present in a naturally occurring version of the protein is substituted with a non-natural amino acid.
• polypeptides comprising at least one non-natural amino acid containing a carbonyl group, a ketone, an aldehyde, a hydrazine, heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle group, or protected or masked forms thereof.
• Introduction of at least one non-natural amino acid into a polypeptide can allow for the application of conjugation chemistries that involve specific chemical reactions,- including, but not limited to, with one or more non- natural amino acids while not reacting with the commonly occurring 20 amino acids.
• the non-naturally occurring amino acid side chains can also be modified by utilizing chemistry methodologies described herein or suitable for the particular functional groups or substituents present in the naturally encoded amino acid.
• non-natural amino acid methods and compositions described herein provide conjugates of substances having a wide variety of functional groups, substituents or moieties, with other substances including but not limited to a desired functionality.
• 002221 In certain embodiments the non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides, linkers and reagents described herein, including compounds of Formulas I-XV, and compounds 1-4 are stable in aqueous solution under mildly acidic conditions (including but not limited to pH of about 1 to about 6). In other embodiments, such compounds are stable for at least one month under mildly acidic conditions. In other embodiments, such compounds are stable for at least 2 weeks under mildly acidic conditions. In other embodiments, such compounds are stable for at least 5 days under mildly acidic conditions
• compositions, methods, techniques and strategies described herein are methods for studying or using any of the aforementioned modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptides. Included within this aspect, by way of example only, are therapeutic, diagnostic, assay-based, industrial, cosmetic, plant biology, environmental, energy-production, consumer products and/or military uses which would benefit from a polypeptide comprising a modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptide or protein.
• the methods and compositions described herein include incorporation of one or more non-natural amino acids into a polypeptide.
• One or more non-natural amino acids are, in certain embodiments, incorporated at one or more particular positions which does not disrupt activity of the polypeptide. This is optionally achieved by making "conservative" substitutions, including but not limited to, substituting hydrophobic amino acids with non-natural or natural hydrophobic amino acids, bulky amino acids with non-natural or natural bulky amino acids, hydrophilic amino acids with non-natural or natural hydrophilic amino acids) and/or inserting the non-natural amino acid in a location that is not required for activity. Although such substitions are not known for the non-natural amino acids described herein, the practice of making conservative substitutions within the group of naturally-occurring amino acids has been documented. Similar approaches are optionally used for the non-natural amino acids described herein.
• a variety of biochemical and structural approaches can be employed to select the desired sites for substitution with a non-natural amino acid within the polypeptide. Any position of the polypeptide chain is suitable for selection to incorporate a non-natural amino acid, and selection is optionally based on rational design or by random selection for any or no particular desired purpose.
• Selection of desired sites is optionally based on producing a non-natural amino acid polypeptide (which is optionally further modified or remain unmodified) having any desired property or activity, including but not limited to agonists, super-agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists, antagonists, receptor binding modulators, receptor activity modulators, modulators of binding to binder partners, binding partner activity modulators, binding partner conformation modulators, dimer or multimer formation, no change to activity or property compared to the native molecule, or manipulating any physical or chemical property of the polypeptide such as solubility, aggregation, or stability.
• locations in the polypeptide required for biological activity of a polypeptide can be identified using methods including, but not limited to, point mutation analysis, alanine scanning or homolog scanning methods. Residues other than those identified as critical to biological activity by methods including, but not limited to, alanine or homolog scanning mutagenesis are good candidates for substitution with a non-natural amino acid depending on the desired activity sought for the polypeptide. Alternatively, the sites identified as critical to biological activity are also good candidates for substitution with a non-natural amino acid, again depending on the desired activity sought for the polypeptide. Another alternative would be to simply make serial substitutions in each position on the polypeptide chain with a non-natural amino acid and observe the effect on the activities of the polypeptide.
• Any means, technique, or method for selecting a position for substitution with a non-natural amino acid into any polypeptide is suitable for use in the methods, techniques and compositions described herein.
• the structure and activity of naturally-occurring mutants of a polypeptide that contain deletions can also be examined to determine regions of the protein that are likely to be tolerant of substitution with a non- natural amino acid. Once residues that are likely to be intolerant to substitution with non-natural amino acids have been eliminated, the impact of proposed substitutions at each of the remaining positions can be examined using methods including, but not limited to, the three-dimensional structure of the relevant polypeptide, and any associated ligands or binding proteins.
• X-ray crystallographic and NMR structures of many polypeptides are available in the Protein Data Bank (PDB, www.rcsb.org), a centralized database containing three-dimensional structural data of large molecules of proteins and nucleic acids, one can be used to identify amino acid positions that can be substituted with non-natural amino acids. .
• models are optionally made investigating the secondary and tertiary structure of polypeptides, if three-dimensional structural data is not available. Thus, the identity of amino acid positions that are available for substitution with non-natural amino acids is readily obtained.
• Exemplary sites of incorporation of a non-natural amino acid include, but are not limited to, those that are excluded from potential receptor binding regions, or regions for binding to binding proteins or ligands, are fully or partially solvent exposed, have minimal or no hydrogen-bonding interactions with nearby residues, are minimally exposed to nearby reactive residues, and/or are in regions that are highly flexible as predicted by the three-dimensional crystal structure of a particular polypeptide with its associated receptor, ligand or binding proteins.
• a wide variety of non-natural amino acids are optionally substituted for, or incorporated into, a given position in a polypeptide.
• a particular non-natural amino acid is selected for incorporation based on an examination of the three dimensional crystal structure of a polypeptide, with its associated ligand, receptor and/or binding proteins, a preference for conservative substitutions
• the methods described herein include incorporating into the polypeptide the non- natural amino acid, where the non-natural amino acid comprises a first reactive group; and contacting the polypeptide with a molecule (including but not limited to a desired functionality) that comprises a second reactive group.
• the first reactive group is a carbonyl moiety and the second reactive group is a hydrazine moiety, whereby an indole linkage is formed.
• the first reactive group is a hydrazine moiety and the second reactive group is carbonyl moiety, whereby an indole linkage is formed.
• the non-natural amino acid substitution(s) or incorporation(s) will be combined with other additions, substitutions, or deletions within the polypeptide to affect other chemical, physical, pharmacologic and/or biological traits.
• the other additions, substitutions or deletions increase the stability (including but not limited to, resistance to proteolytic degradation) of the polypeptide or increase affinity of the polypeptide for its appropriate receptor, ligand and/or binding proteins.
• the other additions, substitutions or deletions increase the solubility (including but not limited to, when expressed in E. coli or other host cells) of the polypeptide.
• sites are selected for substitution with a naturally encoded or non-natural amino acid in addition to another site for incorporation of a non-natural amino acid for the purpose of increasing the polypeptide solubility following expression in E. coli. or other recombinant host cells.
• the polypeptides comprise another addition, substitution, or deletion that modulates affinity for the associated ligand, binding proteins, and/or receptor, modulates (including but not limited to, increases or decreases) receptor dimerization, stabilizes receptor dimers, modulates circulating half-life, modulates release or bio-availability, facilitates purification, or improves or alters a particular route of administration.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptide can comprise chemical or enzyme cleavage sequences, protease cleavage sequences, reactive group ' s, antibody-binding domains (including but not limited to, FLAG or poly-His) or other affinity based sequences (including but not limited to, FLAG, poly-His, GST, etc.) or linked molecules (including but not limited to, biotin) that improve detection (including but not limited to, GFP), transport thru tissues or cell membranes, prodrug release or activation, size reduction.purif ⁇ cation or other traits of the polypeptide.
• chemical or enzyme cleavage sequences including but not limited to, FLAG or poly-His
• affinity based sequences including but not limited to, FLAG, poly-His, GST, etc.
• linked molecules including but not limited to, biotin
• polypeptides or proteins are not limited to a particular type, class or family of polypeptides or proteins. Indeed, virtually any polypeptide is optionally designed or modified to include at least one modified or unmodified non-natural amino acids described herein. By way of example only, the polypeptide is homologous to a therapeutic protein.
• GH growth hormone
• the following proteins include those encoded by genes of the growth hormone (GH) supergene family (Bazan, F., Immunology Today 11 : 350-354 ( 1990); Bazan, J.
• cytokines and growth factors including ciliary neurotrophic factor (CNTF), leukemia inhibitory factor (LIF), thrombopoietin (TPO), oncostatin M, macrophage colony stimulating factor (M-CSF), IL-3, IL-6, IL-7, IL-9, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, and granulocyte-colony stimulating factor (G-CSF), as well as the IFN's such as alpha, beta, omega, tau, epsilon, and gamma interferon belong to this family (reviewed in Mott and Campbell, Current Opinion in Structural Biology 5: 114-121 (1995); Silvennoinen and IhIe (1996) SIGNALLING BY THE HEMATOPOIETIC CYTOKINE RECEPTORS). All of the above cytokines and growth factors are now considered to comprise one large gene family.
• CNTF ciliary neurotrophic factor
• LIF leukemia inhibitory factor
• TPO
• GH family members including but not limited to; GH and EPO, bind a single type of receptor and cause it to form hornodimers.
• Other family members including but not limited to, IL-2, 1L4. and IL-6, bind more than one type of receptor and cause the receptors to form heterodimers or higher order aggregates (Davis et al., ( 1993) Science 260: 1805-1808; Paonessa et al., 1995) EMBO J.
• the A-B loop, the C-D loop (and D-E loop of interferon/ IL-10-like members of the GH superfamily) are also Opttionally substituted with a non-natural amino acid.
• Amino acids proximal to helix A and distal to the final helix also tend not to be involved in receptor binding and also are optional sites for introducing non-natural amino acids.
• a non-natural amino acid is substituted at any position within a loop structure including but not limited to the first 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or more amino acids of the A-B, B-C, C-D or D-E loop.
• a non-natural amino acid is substituted within the last 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or more amino acids of the A-B, B-C, C-D or D-E loop.
• Certain members of the GH family including but not limited to, EPO, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-6, IFN, GM- CSF, TPO, IL-IO, IL-12 p35, 1L-13, IL-15 and beta interferon contain N-linked and/or O-linked sugars.
• the glycosylation sites in the proteins occur almost exclusively in the loop regions and not in the alpha helical bundles. Because the loop regions generally are not involved in receptor binding and because they are sites for the covalent attachment of sugar groups, they are useful sites for introducing non-natural amino acid substitutions into the proteins.
• Amino acids that comprise the N- and O-linked glycosylation sites in the proteins are sites for non-natural amino acid substitutions because these amino acids are surface-exposed. Therefore, the natural protein tolerates bulky sugar groups attached to the proteins at these sites and the glycosylation sites tend to be located away from the receptor binding sites.
• Additional members of the GH gene family are likely to be discovered in the future.
• New members of the GH supergene family can be identified through computer-aided secondary and tertiary structure analyses of the predicted protein sequences, and by selection techniques designed to identify molecules that bind to a particular target.
• Members of the GH supergene family typically possess four or five amphipathic helices joined by non-helical amino acids (the loop regions).
• the proteins contain a hydrophobic signal sequence at their N-terminus to promote secretion from the cell.
• Such later discovered members of the GH supergene family also are included within the methods and compositions described herein.
• the non-natural amino acids used in the methods and compositions described herein have at least one of the following four properties: (1) at least one functional group on the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid has at least one characteristic and/or activity and/or reactivity orthogonal to the chemical reactivity of the 20 common, genetically-encoded amino acids (i.e., alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine), or at least orthogonal to the chemical reactivity of the naturally occurring amino acids present in the polypeptide that includes the non-natural amino acid; (2) the introduced non-natural amino acids are substantially chemically inert toward the 20 common, genetically-encoded amino acids; (3) the non-natural amino acid
• FIGS. 15, 16, and 18 present amino acids having a substituted carbocyclic aryl sidechain, it is to be understood that these FIGS, also disclose substituted heteroaryl sidechains.
• each of the compounds of FIG. 15 has a substituted phenyl sidechain; however, in some embodiments, the phenyl group is replaced by a pyridinyl group, a pyrmidinyl group, a pyrazinyl group, a thiofuranyl group. or a furanyl group.
• the carbocyclic aryl sidechains are merely illustrative examples of the variety of aromatic groups included within the present disclosure.
• Non-natural amino acids optionally also include a carbonyl group or a protected or masked groups that can be transformed into a carbonyl group, a carbonyl group after deprotection of the protected group or unmasking of the masked group, a hydrazine group or a protected or masked group that can be transformed into a hydrazine group.
• Non-natural amino acids that are optionally used in the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, amino acids comprising a photoactivatable cross-linker, spin-labeled amino acids, fluorescent amino acids, metal binding amino acids, metal-containing amino acids, radioactive amino acids, amino acids with novel functional groups, amino acids that covalently or noncovalently interact with other molecules, photocaged and/or photoisomerizable amino acids, amino acids comprising biotin or a biotin analogue, glycosylated amino acids such as a sugar substituted serine, other carbohydrate modified amino acids, keto-containing amino acids, amino acids comprising polyethylene glycol or other polyethers, heavy atom substituted amino acids, chemically cleavable and/or photocleavable amino acids, amino acids with an elongated side chains as compared to natural amino acids, including but not limited to, polyethers or long chain hydrocarbons, including but not limited to, greater than about 5 or greater than about 10 carbons, carbon-linked sugar-linked sugar
• non-natural amino acids comprise a saccharide moiety.
• examples of such amino acids include /V-acetyl-L-glucosaminyl-L-serine, iV-acetyl-L-galactosaminyl-L-serine, /V-acetyl-L-glucosaminyl- L-threonine, ⁇ '-acetyl-L-glucosaminyl-L-asparagine and O-mannosaminyl-L-serine.
• amino acids also include examples where the naturally-occurring N- or O- linkage between the amino acid and the saccharide is replaced by a covalent linkage not commonly found in nature - including but not limited to, an alkene, an oxime, a thioether, an amide, a heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, a carbonyl and the like.
• examples of such amino acids also include saccharides that are not commonly found in naturally- occurring proteins such as 2-deoxy-glucose, 2-deoxygalactose and the like.
• the chemical moieties incorporated into polypeptides via incorporation of non-natural amino acids into such polypeptides offer a variety of advantages and manipulations of the polypeptides.
• the unique non-natural amino acids include but not limited to, amino acids with benzophenone and arylazides (including but not limited to, phenylazide side chains), for example, allow for efficient in vivo and in vitro photocrosslinking of protein.
• photoreactive non-natural amino acids include, but are not limited to, p-azido-phenylalanine and p-benzoyl-phenylalanine.
• the polypeptide with the photoreactive non-natural amino acids is then optionally crosslinked at will by excitation of the photoreactive group-providing temporal control.
• the methyl group of a non-natural amino is substituted with an isotopically labeled, including but not limited to, with a methyl group, as a probe of local structure and dynamics, including but not limited to, with the use of nuclear magnetic resonance and vibrational spectroscopy.
• Non-natural amino acids containing a hydrazine group allow for reaction with a variety of carbonyl and carbonyl equivalent groups to form conjugates via indole linkage.
• non-natural amino acids with sidechains comprising a hydrazine group, a hydrazine like group (which has reactivity similar to a hydrazine group and is structurally similar to a hydrazine group), a masked hydrazine group (which can be readily converted into a hydrazine group), or a protected hydrazine group (which has reactivity similar to a hydrazine group upon deprotection).
• Such amino acids include amino acids having the structure of Formula (I):
• A is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkylene, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1, 2, or 3, -
• each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl;
• R is H, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, carbonyl, or substituted carbonyl;
• R 1 is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• each of R 3 and R 4 is independently H, halogen, lower alkyl, or substituted lower alkyl, or R 3 and R 4 taken together or two R 3 groups taken together optionally form a cycloalkyl or a heterocycloalkyl; or the -A-B-J-R groups together form a bicyclic or tricyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl comprising a hydrazine group, a protected hydrazine group or a masked hydrazine group;
• J can be attached to B and R at any position.
• J is a hydrazinephenyl derivative
• B and J are optionally positioned around the ring, as illustrated below:
• the ring is optionally further optionally substituted.
• at least one of the adjacent substituent to hydrazine group is hydrogen.
• Such non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• both A and B are bonds, each R 3 is H and R 4 is H.
• and R 2 are at least one amino acid.
• each of Ri and Ri are at least two amino acids.
• and R 2 are at least three amino acids.
• and R 2 are at least four amino acids. In a further embodiment, each of R
• A is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkylene, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O)t- where k is 1, 2, or 3, -S(O) ⁇ (aIkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -NR'-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)N(R'
• R 1 is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 3 and R 4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen or from an amine protecting group, including, but not limited to,
• each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, CN, NO 2 , - N(R') 2> -C(O)R', -C(O)N(R') 2 , -OR', and -S(O) k R ⁇ where k is 1, 2 or 3 and each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl.
• non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or are incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• both A and B are bonds.
• each of Ri and R 2 are at least one amino acid.
• each of Ri and R 2 are at least two amino acids.
• and R 2 are at least three amino acids.
• and R 2 are at least four amino acids.
• each of R 1 and R 2 are at least five amino acids.
• and R 2 are at least eix amino acids.
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, - arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-, -N(R')-, -S-, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1 , 2, or 3, - S(O) k (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-.
• R3 and R 4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen or from an amine protecting group, including, but not limited to. - '- 1 V O - ' - -- 0 --* ; and each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, -N(R') 2 , - C(O)R', -C(O)N(R') 2 , -OR', and -S(O) k R ⁇ where k is 1, 2 or 3 and each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; and n is O to 8.
• non-natural amino acids may be in the form of a salt, or may be incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• a compound of Formula (II) having the structure:
• n 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4
• m 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4
• and X 2 are independently a bond, O, or NH
• y is 0 or 1.
• Such compounds are optionally amino protected and carboxyl protected, or a salt thereof, or may be incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post rranslationally modified.
• amino acids having the structure of Formula (IV) are included:
• R 1 is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 3 and R 4 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen or from an amine protecting group, including, but not limited to,
• each R 11 is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, CN, NO 2 , - N(R')., -C(O)R', -C(O)N(R') 2 , -OR', and -S(O) k R ⁇ where k is 1, 2 or 3 and each R' is independently H. alkyl, or substituted alkyl.
• non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• such compounds are optionally amino protected, optionally carboxyl protected, optionally amino protected and carboxyl protected, or a salt thereof, or optionally incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• Amino acids with an electrophilic reactive group allow for a variety of reactions to link molecules via various chemical reactions, including, but not limited to, nucleophilic addition reactions.
• electrophilic reactive groups include a carbonyl group (including a keto- or aldehyde group), a carbonyl-like group (which has reactivity similar to a carbonyl group and is structurally similar to a carbonyl group), a masked carbonyl group (which can be readily converted into a carbonyl group), or a protected carbonyl group (which has reactivity similar to a carbonyl group upon deprotection).
• Such amino acids include amino acids having the structure of Formula (V):
• A is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkylene, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S
• R is H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, or substituted cycloalkyl; each R" is independently H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, or a protecting group, or when more than one R" group is present, two R" optionally form a heterocycloalkyl;
• R i is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; and R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; each ofR 3 and R 4 is independently H, halogen, lower alkyl, or substituted lower alkyl, or R 3 and R 4 or two R 3 groups optionally form a cycloalkyl or a heterocycloalkyl; or the -A-B-J-R groups together form a bicyclic or tricyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl comprising at least one carbonyl group, including a dicarbonyl group, protected carbonyl group, including a protected dicarbonyl group, or masked carbonyl group, including a masked dicarbonyl group; or the -J-R group together forms a monocyclic or bicyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl comprising at least
• non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• compounds of Formula (V) are stable in aqueous solution for at least 1 month under mildly acidic conditions. In certain embodiments, compounds of Formula (V) are stable for at least 2 weeks under mildly acidic conditions. In certain embodiments, compound of Formula (V) are stable for at least 5 days under mildly acidic conditions. In certain embodiments, such acidic conditions are pH of about 2 to about 8.
• B is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -CON(R')-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, - S(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O)(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, or -S(O) 2 (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-.
• R is Ci_ 6 alkyl or cycloalkyl.
• R is -CH 3 , -CH(CHj) 2 , or cyclopropyl.
• R ( is H, tert-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), 9-Fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc), N-acetyl, tetrafluoroacetyl (TFA), or benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz).
• is a resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide.
• R 2 is OH, O-methyl, O-ethyl, or O-/-butyl.
• R 2 is a resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide. In certain embodiments of compounds of Formula (V), R 2 is a polynucleotide. In certain embodiments of compounds of Formula (V), R 2 is ribonucleic acid (RNA). In certain embodiments of compounds of Formula (V), R 2 is tRNA. In certain embodiments of compounds of Formula (V), the tRNA specifically recognizes a selector codon.
• the selector codon is selected from the group consisting of an amber codon, ochre codon, opal codon, a unique codon, a rare codon, an unnatural codon, a five-base codon, and a four-base codon.
• R 2 is a suppressor tRNA.
• A is substituted lower alkylene, C 4 -arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a divalent linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-, -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -N(R')-, -C(O)N(R')-, -CON
• A is optional, and when present is substituted lower alkylene, C 4 -arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is a divalent linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -0-, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-, - S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -N(R')-, -C(O)N(R')-, -CON(R')-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -CSN(R')-, -N(R')C0- (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -N(R')C(O)O-, -N(
• A is lower alkylene
• B is optional, and when present is a divalent linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, and -CON(R')-(alky lene or substituted alkylene)-, and (iv) A is phenylene;
• B is a divalent linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-
• each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; each R" is independently H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, or a protecting group, or when more than one R" group is present, two R" optionally form a heterocycloalkyl;
• Ri is optional, and when present, is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is optional, and when present, is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• each R 3 and R 4 is independently H, halogen, lower alkyl, or substituted lower alkyl
• R' is H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl;
• R is H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, or substituted cycloalkyl; or the -A-B-J-R groups together form a bicyclic or tricyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl comprising at least one carbonyl.
• amino acids having the structure of Formula (VI) are included:
• A is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkylene, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1, 2, or 3, -S(O) k (aIkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -NR'-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)N
• R is H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, or substituted cycloalkyl
• Ri is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; and R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; with a proviso that when A is phenylene, B is present; and that when A is -(CH 2 J 4 -, B is not -
• non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• amino acids having the structure of Formula (VII) are included:
• B is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1 , 2, or 3, -S(O) k (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, - NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -NR'-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -CON(R')-(alky
• R is H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, or substituted cycloalkyl
• R ⁇ is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, NO 2 , CN, - N(R') 2 , -C(O)R 1 , -C(0)N(R') 2 , -OR', and -S(O) k R ⁇ where k is 1, 2, or 3, where each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; or at least two R 11 taken together form a heterocycle, heteroaryl or aryl.
• non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• non-natural amino acids are optionally amino protected group, carboxyl protected and/or in the form of a salt, or incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• amino acids having the structure of Formula (VIIl) are included:
• - B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1 , 2, or 3, -S(O) k (aIkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -NR ' -(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-,
• -C(R') r N N-, -N(R')C(NCN)NR'-(alkylene or substituted alkylene), -N(R')C(NNO 2 )NR--(alkylene or substituted alkylene), -N(R')C(NCOOR')NR'-(alkylene or substituted alkylene), and -C(R') 2 -N(R')-N(R')- , where each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; R is H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, or substituted cycloalkyl; R
• A is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, lower heteroalkylcne, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkylene, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1 , 2, or 3, -S(O) k (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-,
• R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• Y and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of -OH, alkyl substituted oxygen, -SH or alkyl substituted sulfur and when Y and Z taken together can form a cycloalkyl ring.
• non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or are incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1, 2, or 3, -S(O ⁇ (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -NR'-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -CON(R')-(al
• Ri is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• Each R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, CN 1 NO 2 , - N(R') 2 , -C(O)R', -C(0)N(R') 2 , -OR', and -S(O) k R ⁇ where k is 1, 2, or 3,whcre each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; or at least two R 0 taken together form a heterocycle, hetoroaryl or aryl; and
• Y and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of -OH, alkyl substituted oxygen, -SH or alkyl substituted sulfur and when Y and Z taken together can form a cycloalkyl ring.
• non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or are incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• amino acids are included:
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, - arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1, 2, or 3, -S(O) k (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-,
• Y independently selected from the group consisting of OR", NR"R", NC(O)R” where each R" is is independently H, alkyl, substituted alkyl.
• non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or are incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• amino acids are included:
• R is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• Each R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl.CN, NO 2 , - N(R') 2 , -C(O)R', -C(O)N(R') 2 , -OR', and -S(O) t R ⁇ where k is 1 , 2, or 3, where each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; or at least two R 4 , taken together form a heterocycle, hetoroaryl or aryl; R 3 and R 4 are independently H, halogen, CN, NO 2 , alkyl, substituted alkyl, N(R') 2 , C(O)R', -C(0)N
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, - arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1, 2, or 3, -S(O) k (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -NR'-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -CON(
• each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl
• R is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, -N(R') 2 , - C(O)R', -C(O)N(R') 2 , -OR', and -S(O) 1 JR.', where k is 1 , 2, or 3, where each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; and n is O to 8, and
• Y and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of -OH, alkyl substituted oxygen, -SH or alkyl substituted sulfur and when Y and Z taken together can form a cycloalkyl ring.
• non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or are incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• amino acids are included:
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, - arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1 , 2, or 3, -S(O) k (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-( alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -NR '-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-,
• R 1 is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• each R 3 is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, -N(R') 2 , - C(O)R', -C(O)N(R') 2( -OR', and -S(O) k R ⁇ where k is 1, 2, or 3, where each R' is independently II, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; and n is 0 to 8; and
• Y independently selected from the group consisting of OR", NR"R", NC(O)R” where each R" is is independently H, alkyl, substituted alkyl.
• Such non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or are incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified. (00274) In addition, the following amino acids are included:
• Non-natural amino acids containing an indole group are produced by reaction of either a non- natural amino acid containing a hydrazine with a reagent containing a carbonyl group, or a non-natural amino acid containing a carbonyl with a reagent containing a hydrazine group.
• This reaction is called the Fisher indole synthesis.
• This reaction is traditionally carried out under very harsh condition in the presence of strong acids and /or metal ion accelerators, or uder reflux in organic solvents.
• Fig. 2 describes the mechanisim of this reaction which involves arylhdrazone intermediate formation between arylhydrazine and carbonyl compound, followed by [3,3] sigmatropic rearrangement to form the indole product after elimination of ammonia.
• the reactions between carbonyl and arylhydrazines is perfomed in aqueous buffer at room temperature.
• the reactions between carbonyl and arylhydrazines is perfomed at pH of about 1 to about 6 and about 2 to about 4.
• the reaction is accelerated, for example, by performing the hydrazone intermediate formation and the rearrangement step to form the indole at different pH.
• the formation of hydrazone intermediate is realized at pH 5.
• the rearrangement step is perfomed at pH 1.
• Fig. 3-6, and 8-11 describe the effect of the pH on Fisher indole synthesis.
• metal ions are used to accelerate the rate of formation of indole product.
• Fig. 12 illustrates non limiting examples of metal ions that have accelerating effect on the rate of formation of the indole product.
• the amount of organic solvent in the reaction milieu has an effect on the rate of formation of indole product.
• Fig. 14 describes the effect of the solvent on the rate of formation of the indole product.
• the reagents used in this reaction are optionally further linked to a desired functionality.
• the non-natural amino acid is incorporated into a polypeptide, whereupon reaction with the appropriate reagent a conjugate is formed between the polypeptide and molecule of interest.
• Such amino acids include amino acids having the structure of Formula (XV):
• A is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, lower heleroalkylene, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkylene, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, - arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1, 2, or 3, - S(O) k (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -N(R')-, -NR '
• R ⁇ is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is OH. an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; each OfR 3 and R 4 is independently H, halogen, lower alkyl, or substituted lower alkyl, or R 3 and R 4 or two R 3 groups optionally form a cycloalkyl or a heterocycloalkyl; each R 5 is independently H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, substituted alkylalkoxy, polyalkylene oxide, substituted polyalkylene oxide, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkaryl, substituted alkaryl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, -(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-ON(R") 2 , CN, NO 2 , -(alkylene
• Y is selected from: a label; a dye; a polymer; a water-soluble polymer; a derivative of polyethylene glycol; a photocrosslmker; a cytotoxic compound; a drug; an affinity label; a photoaffinity label; a reactive compound; a resin; a second protein or polypeptide or polypeptide analog; an antibody or antibody fragment; a metal chelator; a cofactor; a fatty acid; a carbohydrate; a polynucleotide; a DNA; a RNA; an antisense polynucleotide; a saccharide, a water-soluble dendrimer, a cyclodextrin, a biomaterial; a nanoparticle; a spin label; a fluorophore; a metal-containing moiety; a radioactive moiety; a novel functional group; a group that covalently or noncovalently interacts with other molecules; a photocaged moiety; an actinic radiation excit
• L is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, -O-, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k -, -S(O) ⁇ ⁇ (aIkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -N(R')-, -NR'-(alkylene
• Y is selected from a water-soluble polymer; a polyalkylene oxide; a polyethylene glycol; a derivative of polyethylene glycol; a photocrosslinker; at least one amino acid; at least one sugar group; at least one nucleotide; at least one nucleoside; a ligand; biotin; a biotin analogue; a detectable label; and any combination thereof; [00281 ] In a further embodiment is a compound having the structures of compounds 1-4:
• A is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower aDcylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkylene, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker, linked at one end to an indole-containing moiety, the linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, - arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1 , 2, or 3, -S(O) k (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substitute
• R ⁇ is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; and R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; n is O, 1, 2, or 3, and m is O, 1 , 2, or 3, provided that at least one of n or m is not O; wherein, each ring in structures 1, 2, 3, and 4 that has an associated R 3 group can contain O, 1 , or 2 R a groups and each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, -N(R 1 ') 2 , -C(O)R", -C(O)N(R") 2 , -OR", and -S(O) k R", where k is 1, 2, or 3, where each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; or when more than one R a group is present, two R
• R 5 is L-X, where, X is a selected from the group consisting of: a label; a dye; a polymer; a water- soluble polymer; a derivative of polyethylene glycol; a photocrossl inker; a cytotoxic compound; a drug; an affinity label; a photoaffinity label; a reactive compound; a resin; a second protein or polypeptide or polypeptide analog; an antibody or antibody fragment; a metal chelator; a cofactor; a fatty acid; a carbohydrate; a polynucleotide; a DNA; a RNA; an antisense polynucleotide; a saccharide, a water-soluble dendrimer, a
• X is selected from a water-soluble polymer; a polyalkylene oxide; a polyethylene glycol; a derivative of polyethylene glycol; a photocrossl inker; at least one amino acid; at least one sugar group; at least one nucleotide; at least one nucleoside; a ligand; biotin; a biotin analogue; a detectable label; and any combination thereof;
• a compound having the structures of compounds 1-4 wherein A is a bond, substituted or unsubstituted lower alkylene, or an unsubsituted or substituted arylene selected from the group consisting of a phenylene, pyridinylene, pyrimidinylene or thiophenylene.
• A is bond.
• A is substituted or unsubstituted lower heteroalkylene.
• A is a phenylene.
• a compound having the structures of compounds 1-4, wherein A is a substituted lower alkylene, wherein the substituent is the single 0 group.
• B is a bond, lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, -O-( alkylene or substituted alkylene)-.
• S(O) 2 (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-.
• B is a bond.
• B is -O(CH 2 )-, -NHCH 2 -, -NHCO-, -C(O)-, -C(O)-(CH 2 )-, -CONH-(CH 2 )-, -SCH 2 -, -
• R 1 is H, tert-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), 9-Fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Frnoc), N-acetyl, tetrafluoroacetyl (TFA), or benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz).
• R 1 is a resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide.
• R 2 is OH, O-methyl, O- ethyl, or O-/-butyl.
• a compound having the structures of compounds 1-4 wherein R 2 is a resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide.
• R 2 is a polynucleotide.
• R 2 is ribonucleic acid (RNA).
• RNA ribonucleic acid
• R 2 is tRNA.
• tRNA specifically recognizes a selector codon.
• a compound having the structures of compounds 1-4 wherein said selector codon is selected from the group consisting of an amber codon, ochre codon, opal codon, a unique codon, a rare codon, an unnatural codon, a five-base codon, and a four-base codon.
• R ⁇ is a suppressor tRNA.
• X is a biologically active agent selected from the group consisting of a peptide, protein, enzyme, antibody, drug, dye, lipid, nucleoside, oligonucleotide, cell, virus, liposome, microparticle, and micelle.
• X is a drug selected from the group consisting of an antibiotic, fungicide, anti-viral agent, anti-inflammatory agent, anti-tumor agent, cardiovascular agent, anti-anxiety agent, hormone, growth factor, and steroidal agent.
• a compound having the structures of compounds 1-4 wherein X is an enzyme selected from the group consisting of horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, ⁇ - galactosidase, and glucose oxidase.
• X is a detectable label selected from the group consisting of a fluorescent, phosphorescent, chemiluminescent, chelating, electron dense, magnetic, intercalating, radioactive, chromophoric, and energy transfer moiety.
• a compound having the structures of compounds 1-4 wherein X is a polymer comprising alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, substituted alkylalkoxy, polyalkylene oxide, substituted polyalkylene oxide, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkaryl, substituted alkaryl, aralkyl, or substituted aralkyl.
• said polymer comprises polyalkylene oxide or substituted polyalkylene oxide.
• compounds of Formula (XV) are stable in aqueous solution for at least 1 month under mildly acidic conditions.
• compounds of Formula (XV) are stable for at least 2 weeks under mildly acidic conditions.
• compound of Formula (XV) are stable for at least 5 days under mildly acidic conditions.
• such acidic conditions are pH about 2 to about 8. (00284)
• Non-limiting examples of such amino acids include amino acids having the following structures:
• non-natural amino acids are optionally in the form of a salt, or are incorporated into a non-natural amino acid polypeptide, polymer, polysaccharide, or a polynucleotide and optionally post translationally modified.
• each ring in structures 5, 6, 7 and 8 that has an associated R 3 group can contain 0, 1 , or 2 R 3 groups and each R a is independently selected from the_group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, -N(R")* -C(O)R", -C(O)N(R") 2 , -OR", and -S(O) k R", where k is 1, 2, or 3, where each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; or when more than one R 3 group is present, two R 3 optionally form an aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl.
• and X 2 are independently a bond, O, or NH; and y is 0 or 1.
• Non-natural amino acid uptake by a eukaryotic cell is one issue that is typically considered when designing and selecting non-natural amino acids, including but not limited to, for incorporation into a protein.
• the high charge density of ⁇ -amino acids suggests that these compounds are unlikely to be cell permeable.
• Natural amino acids are taken up into the eukaryotic cell via a collection of protein-based transport systems. A rapid screen can be done which assesses which non-natural amino acids, if any, are taken up by cells. See, e.g., the toxicity assays in, e.g., the U.S. Patent Publication No.
• the non-natural amino acid produced via cellular uptake as described herein is produced in a concentration sufficient for efficient protein biosynthesis, including but not limited to, a natural cellular amount, but not to such a degree as to affect the concentration of the other amino acids or exhaust cellular resources.
• Typical concentrations produced in this manner are about 10 niM to about 0.05 mM.
• biosynthetic pathways already exist in cells for the production of amino acids and other compounds. While a biosynthetic method for a particular non-natural amino acid may not exist in nature, including but not limited to, in a cell, the methods and compositions described herein provide such methods.
• biosynthetic pathways for non-natural amino acids are optionally generated in host cell by adding new enzymes or modifying existing host cell pathways. Additional new enzymes include naturally occurring enzymes or artificially evolved enzymes.
• the biosynthesis of /7-amino ⁇ henylalanine (as presented in an example in WO 2002/085923 entitled "In vivo incorporation of unnatural amino acids") relies on the addition of a combination of known enzymes from other organisms.
• the genes for these enzymes can be introduced into a eukaryotic cell by transforming the cell with a plasmid comprising the genes.
• the genes when expressed in the cell, provide an enzymatic pathway to synthesize the desired compound. Examples of the types of enzymes that are optionally added are provided herein. Additional enzymes sequences are found, for example, in Genbank. Artificially evolved enzymes can be added into a cell in the same manner. In this manner, the cellular machinery and resources of a cell are manipulated to produce non-natural amino acids.
• a variety of methods are available for producing novel enzymes for use in biosynthetic pathways or for evolution of existing pathways.
• recursive recombination including but not limited to, as developed by Maxygen, Inc. (available on the world wide web at www.maxygen.com), can be used to develop novel enzymes and pathways. See, e.g., Stemmer (1994), Rapid evolution of a protein in vitro by DNA shuffling, Nature 370(4):389-391 : and, Stemmer, (1994), DNA shuffling by random fragmentation and reassembly: In vitro recombination for molecular evolution, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA.. 91 : 10747-10751.
• DesignPathTM developed by Genencor (available on the world wide web at genencor.com) is optionally used for metabolic pathway engineering, including but not limited to, to engineer a pathway to create a non-natural amino acid in a cell.
• This technology reconstructs existing pathways in host organisms using a combination of new genes, including but not limited to, those identified through functional genomics, and molecular evolution and design.
• Diversa Corporation (available on the world wide web at diversa.com) also provides technology for rapidly screening libraries of genes and gene pathways, including but not limited to, to create new pathways for biosynthetically producing non-natural amino acids.
• the non-natural amino acid produced with an engineered biosynthetic pathway as described herein is produced in a concentration sufficient for efficient protein biosynthesis, including but not limited to, a natural cellular amount, but not to such a degree as to affect the concentration of the other amino acids or exhaust cellular resources.
• Typical concentrations produced in vivo in this manner are about 10 mM to about 0.05 mM.
• non-natural amino acids described herein are optionally synthesized using documented methodologies or using the techniques described herein or by a combination thereof.
• the following table provides various starting electrophiles and nucleophiles which are optionally combined to create a desired functional group. The information provided is meant to be illustrative and not limiting to the synthetic techniques described herein.
• carbon electrophiles are susceptible to attack by complementary nucleophiles, including carbon nucleophiles, wherein an attacking nucleophile brings an electron pair to the carbon electrophile in order to form a new bond between the nucleophile and the carbon electrophile.
• Non-limiting examples of carbon nucleophiles include, but are not limited to alkyl, alkenyl, aryl and alkynyl Grignard, organolithium, organozinc, alkyl-, alkenyl , aryl- and alkynyl-tin reagents (organostannanes), alkyl-, alkenyl-, aryl- and alkynyl-borane reagents (organoboranes and organoboronates); these carbon nucleophiles have the advantage of being kinetically stable in water or polar organic solvents.
• Non-limiting examples of carbon niicleophiles include phosphorus ylids, enol and enolate reagents; these carbon nucleophiles have the advantage of being relatively easy to generate from precursors. Carbon nucleophiles, when used in conjunction with carbon electrophiles, engender new carbon-carbon bonds between the carbon nucleophile and carbon electrophile.
• Non-limiting examples of non-carbon nucleophiles suitable for coupling to carbon electrophiles include but are not limited to primary and secondary amines, thiols, thiolates, and thioethers, alcohols, alkoxides, azides, semicarbazides, and the like.
• non-carbon nucleophiles when used in conjunction with carbon electrophiles, typically generate heteroatom linkages (C-X-C), wherein X is a hetereoatom, including, but'not limited to, oxygen, sulfur, or nitrogen.
• X is a hetereoatom, including, but'not limited to, oxygen, sulfur, or nitrogen.
• 100297 is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2 comprising reacting a compound of Formula (H) with a carbonyl-containing compound, wherein the compound of Formula (II) is,
• A is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkylene, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylenc, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker, linked at one end to an indole containing moiety, the linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O- (alkylene or
• R 1 is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, CN, NO 2 , -N(R') 2 , -C(O)R', -C(0)N(R') 2 , -OR', and -S(O) k R ⁇ where k is 1 , 2 or 3 and each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl
• R 3 and R 4 are independently hydrogen or amine protecting group, including, but not limited to,
• a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, wherein A is substituted or unsubstituted lower alkylene, or an unsubsituted or substituted arylene selected from the group consisting of a phenylene, pyridinylene, pyrimidinylene or thiophenylene.
• A is substituted or unsubstituted lower heteroalkylene.
• A is substituted or unsubstituted lower heteroalkylene.
• B is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -CON(R")-, -NR" -(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -N(R ")CO-, -C(O)-, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -CON(R")-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O)(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, or - S(O) 2 (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-; wherein each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl.
• a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, wherein Ri is H, tert- butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), 9-Fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc), N-acetyl, tetrafluoroacetyl (TFA), or benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz).
• Ri is H, tert- butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), 9-Fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc), N-acetyl, tetrafluoroacetyl (TFA), or benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz).
• R 3 and R 4 are
• is a resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide.
• R 2 is OH, O-methyl, O-ethyl, or O-r-butyl.
• R 2 is a resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide.
• a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, wherein said selector codon is selected from the group consisting of an amber codon, ochre codon, opal codon, a unique codon, a rare codon, an unnatural codon, a five-base codon, and a four-base codon.
• R 2 is a suppressor tRNA.
• each R 0 is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, CN, NO 2 , -N(R") 2 , -C(O)R", -C(O)N(R") 2 , -OR", and -S(O) k R", where k is 1, 2, or 3, where each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl.
• is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, selected from the group consisting of:
• a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, further comprising reacting a compound of Formula (V) with a hydrazine containing agent; wherein the compound of Formula (V) is:
• A is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkylene, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylenc, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-, -O- (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-( alkylene or substituted alkylene
• R is H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, or substituted cycloalkyl; each R" is independently H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, or a protecting group, or when more than one R" group is present, two R" optionally form a heterocycloalkyl;
• R 1 is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide
• R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; each ofR 3 and R 4 is independently H, halogen, lower alkyl, or substituted lower alkyl, or Rj and R 4 or two R 3 groups optionally form a cycloalkyl or a heterocycloalkyl; or the -A-B-J-R groups together form a bicyclic or tricyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl comprising at least one carbonyl group, including a carbonyl group, protected carbonyl group, including a protected carbonyl group, or masked carbonyl group, including a masked carbonyl group; or the -J-R group together forms a monocyclic or bicyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl comprising at least one carbonyl group, including a carbonyl group, protected carbonyl group, including a protected carbonyl group, or masked carbonyl
• In a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, wherein A is substituted or unsubstituted lower alkylene, or an unsubsituted or substituted arylene selected from the group consisting of a phenylene, pyridinylcne, pyrimidinylene or method.
• B is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -CON(R")-, -NR"-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -N(R")CO-, -C(O)-, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -CON(R")-(alkylcne or substituted alkylene)-, -S(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O)(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, or - S(O) 2 (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-.
• a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, selected from the group consisting of:
• each R 1 is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, -N(R"),, -C(O)R", -C(O)N(R") 2 , -OR", and -S(O) k R", where k is 1, 2, or 3, where each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl.
• [00316J in a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, selected from the group consisting of:
• [00317J in a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, corresponding to Formula (VIlI):
• each R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, -N(R") 2 , -C(O)R", -C(O)N(R")* -OR", and -S(O) k R", where k is 1, 2, or 3, where each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl;
• Y and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of -OH, alkyl substituted oxygen, -SH or alkyl substituted sulfur and when Y and Z taken together can form a cycloalkyl ring.
• each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl. -N(R") 2 , -C(O)R", -C(O)N(R") 2 , -OR", and -S(O) k R", where k is 1 , 2, or 3, where each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl;
• Y is independently selected from the group consisting of OR", NR"R", NC(O)R” where each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl.
• each R 0 is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, -N(R") 2 , -C(O)R", -C(O)N(R") 2 , -OR", and -S(O) k R", where k is 1, 2, or 3, where each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; or when more than one R 2 group is present, two R a optionally form a cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl;
• R, and R 4 are independently H, halogen, CN, NO 2 , alkyl, substituted alkyl, N(R') 2 , C(O)R", - C(O)N(R') 2 , -OR', and -S(O) k R', where k is 1, 2, or 3, where each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; X is C, N, or S, with the proviso that when X is O or S, R 4 cannot be H, halogen, CN, NO 2 , alkyl, substituted alkyl, N(R 1 J 2 , C(O)R', -C(O)N(R') 2 , -OR', and -S(O) k R'; where k is 1, 2, or 3, and n is 0,
• each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alky I 1 substituted alkyl;
• Y and Z are independently selected from the group consisting of -OH, alkyl substituted oxygen, -SH or alkyl substituted sulfur and when Y and Z taken together can form a cycloalkyl ring.
• In a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, selected from the group consisting of:
• Y is independently selected from the group consisting of OR", NR"R", NC(O)R” where each R" is independently H, alkyl, substituted alkyl.
• a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, wherein the reaction of the compound with the carbonyl containing or protected carbonyl containing agent has at least one of the following characteristics: (i) occurs in a pH range of about 1 to about 6, (ii) generates an indole linkage which is stable under biological conditions; (iii) is site-specific; (iv) does not irreversibly destroy the tertiary structure of a polypeptide; (v) occurs at room termperature; (vi) occurs readily in aqueous conditions; or (vii) is regioselective and/or regiospecific.
• a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, wherein the mild conditions are pH about 1 to about 6.
• the mild conditions are pH about 3 to about 6.
• the reaction is in an aqueous solution under mild conditions.
• a further embodiment is a method of making a compound of structures 1 or 2, wherein reacting a compound of Formula (V) with a hydrazine containing agent has at least one of the following characteristics: (i) occurs in a pH range of about 1 to about 6, (ii) generates an indole linkage which is stable under biological conditions; (iii) is site-specific; (iv) does not irreversibly destroy the tertiary structure of a polypeptide; (v) occurs rapidly at room termperature; (vi) occurs readily is aqueous conditions; or (vii) is regioselective and/or regiospecific VI.
• compositions and methods described herein provide for the incorporation of at least one non- natural amino acid into a polypeptide.
• the non-natural amino acid are optionally present at any location on the polypeptide, including any terminal position or any internal position of the polypeptide.
• the non-natural amino acid does not destroy the activity and/or the tertiary structure of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide, unless such destruction of the activity and/or tertiary structure was one of the purposes of incorporating the non-natural amino acid into the polypeptide.
• the incorporation of the non-natural amino acid into the polypeptide optionally modifies to some extent the activity (e.g., manipulating the therapeutic effectiveness of the polypeptide, improving the safety profile of the polypeptide, adjusting the pharmacokinetics, pharmacologies and/or pharmacodynamics of the polypeptide (e.g., increasing water solubility, bioavailability, increasing serum half-life, increasing therapeutic half-life, modulating immunogenicity, modulating biological activity, or extending the circulation time), providing additional functionality to the polypeptide, incorporating a tag, label or detectable signal into the polypeptide, easing the isolation properties of the polypeptide, and any combination of the aforementioned modifications) and/or tertiary structure of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide without fully causing destruction of the activity and/or tertiary structure.
• the activity e.g., manipulating the therapeutic effectiveness of the polypeptide, improving the safety profile of the polypeptide, adjusting the
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides compositions comprising non-natural amino acid polypeptides, methods for making such polypeptides and polypeptide compositions, methods for purifying, isolating, and characterizing such polypeptides and polypeptide compositions, and methods for using such polypeptides and polypeptide compositions are considered within the scope of the present disclosure.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein are optionally ligated to another polypeptide (including, by way of example, a non-natural amino acid polypeptide or a naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide).
• the polypeptide is selected, for example, from any known therapeutic protein, that is a protein which is known to have a therapeutic effect on a person having a disease, disorder or condition.
• the polypeptide is selected from alpha- 1 antitrypsin, angiostatin, antihemolytic factor, antibody, antibody fragment, apolipoprotein, apoprotein, atrial natriuretic factor, atrial natriuretic polypeptide, atrial peptide, C-X-C chemokine, T39765, NAP-2, ENA-78, gro-a, gro-b, gro-c, IP- 10, GCP-2, NAP-4, SDF-I, PF4, MIG, calcitonin, c-kit ligand, cytokine, CC chemokine, monocyte chemoattractant protein- 1, monocyte chemoattractant protein- 2, monocyte chemoattractant protein-3, monocyte inflammatory protein-1 alpha, monocyte inflammatory protein-i beta, RANTES, 1309, R83915, R91733, HCCl, T58847, D31065, T64262, CD40, CD40 ligand
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein are optionally produced biosynthetically or non-biosynthetically.
• biosynthetically is meant any method utilizing a translation system (cellular or non- cellular), including use of at least one of the following components: a polynucleotide, a codon, a tRNA, and a ribosome.
• non-biosynthetically any method not utilizing a translation system: this approach can be further divided into methods utilizing solid state peptide synthetic methods, solid phase peptide synthetic methods, methods that utilize at least one enzyme, and methods that do not utilize at least one enzyme; in addition any of these sub-divisions may overlap with another sub-division and many methods optionally utilize a combination of these sub-divisions.
• 00335 The methods, compositions, strategies and techniques described herein are not limited to a particular type, class or family of polypeptides or proteins. Indeed, the scope of the compositions described herein allows for virtually any polypeptide to include at least one non-natural amino acids described herein.
• the polypeptide is homologous to a therapeutic protein.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide is homologous to any polypeptide member of the growth hormone supergene family.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides are optionally further modified as described elsewhere in this disclosure or the non-natural amino acid polypeptide is optionally used without further modification.
• incorpora non-natural amino acid into a polypeptide is done for a variety of purposes, including but not limited to, tailoring changes in protein structure and/or function, changing size, acidity, nucleophilicity, hydrogen bonding, hydrophobicity, accessibility of protease target sites, targeting to a moiety (including but not limited to, for a polypeptide array), etc.
• Polypeptides that include a non-natural amino acid can have enhanced or even entirely new catalytic or biophysical properties.
• compositions with polypeptides that include at least one non-natural amino acid are useful for, including but not limited to, novel therapeutics, diagnostics, catalytic enzymes, industrial enzymes, binding proteins (including but not limited to, antibodies), and research including, but not limited to, the study of protein structure and function. See.
• the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid component(s) of a polypeptide provides a wide range of additional functionality to the polypeptide; by way of example only, and not as a limitation, the sidechain of the non-natural amino acid portion of a polypeptide includes any desired functionality.
• a composition includes at least one polypeptide with at least one, including but not limited to, at least two, at least three, at least four, at least five, at least six, at least seven, at least eight, at least nine, or at least ten or more non-natural amino acids.
• Such non-natural amino acids are optionally the same or different.
• a composition in another aspect, includes a polypeptide with at least one, but fewer than all, of a particular amino acid present in the polypeptide is substituted with a non-natural amino acid(s).
• the non-natural amino acids can be identical or different (such as, by way of example only, the polypeptide can include two or more different types of non-natural amino acids, or can include two of the same non-natural amino acid).
• the non-natural amino acids can be the same, different or a combination of a multiple number of non-natural amino acids of the same kind with at least one different non-natural amino acid.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein are optionally chemically synthesized via solid phase peptide synthesis methods (such as, by way of example only, on a solid resin), by solution phase peptide synthesis methods, and/or without the aid of enzymes
• other embodiments of the non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein allow synthesis via a cell membrane, cellular extract, or lysate system or via an in vivo system, such as, by way of example only, using the cellular machinery of a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell.
• one of the key features of the non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein is that they are synthesized utilizing ribosomes.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides are synthesized by a combination of the methods including, but not limited to, a combination of solid resins, without the aid of enzymes, via the aid of ribosomes, and/or via an in vivo system.
• Synthesis of non-natural amino acid polypeptides via ribosomes and/or an in vivo system has distinct advantages and characteristic from a non-natural amino acid polypeptide synthesized on a solid resin or without the aid of enzymes.
• a system utilizing ribosomes and/or an in vivo system will have impurities stemming from the biological system utilized, including host cell proteins, membrane portions, and lipids, whereas the impurity profile from a system utilizing a solid resin and/or without the aid of enzymes may include organic solvents, protecting groups, resin materials, coupling reagents and other chemicals used in the synthetic procedures.
• the isotopic pattern of the non-natural amino acid polypeptide synthesized via the use of ribosomes and/or an in vivo system may mirror the isotopic pattern of the feedstock utilized for the cells; on the other hand, the isotopic pattern of the non- natural amino acid polypeptide synthesized on a solid resin and/or without the aid of enzymes may mirror the isotopic pattern of the amino acids utilized in the synthesis.
• non-natural amino acid synthesized via the use of ribosomes and/or an in vivo system may be substantially free of the D-isomers of the amino acids and/or may be able to readily incorporate internal cysteine amino acids into the structure of the polypeptide, and/or may rarely provide internal amino acid deletion polypeptides.
• a non-natural amino acid polypeptide synthesized via a solid resin and/or without the use of enzymes may have a higher content of D-isomers of the amino acids and/or a lower content of internal cysteine amino acids and/or a higher percentage of internal amino acid deletion polypeptides.
• one will be able to differentiate a non-natural amino acid polypeptide synthesized by use of a ribosome and/or an in vivo system from a non-natural amino acid polypeptide synthesized via a solid resin and/or without the use of enzymes.
• nucleic acids encoding a polypeptide of interest will be isolated, cloned and often altered using recombinant methods. Such embodiments are used, including but not limited to, for protein expression or during the generation of variants, derivatives, expression cassettes, or other sequences derived from a polypeptide.
• sequences encoding the polypeptides are operably linked to a heterologous promoter.
• Such cells produce such non-natural amino acid polypeptides using the methods described herein or variants thereof, but biosynthetically produce at least one non-natural amino.
• Cells that biosynthesize at least one non-natural amino acid may be produced using the techniques, methods, compositions and strategies described herein or variants thereof.
• a nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide comprising a non-natural amino acid may be synthesized on the basis of the amino acid sequence of the parent polypeptide, and then changing the nucleotide sequence so as to effect introduction (i.e., incorporation or substitution) or removal (i.e., deletion or substitution) of the relevant amino acid residue(s).
• the nucleotide sequence may be conveniently modified by site-directed mutagenesis in accordance with documented methodologies.
• the nucleotide sequence may be prepared by chemical synthesis, including but not limited to, by using an oligonucleotide synthesizer, wherein oligonucleotides are designed based on the amino acid sequence of the desired polypeptide, and preferably selecting those codons that arc favored in the host cell in which the recombinant polypeptide will be produced.
• oligonucleotides are designed based on the amino acid sequence of the desired polypeptide, and preferably selecting those codons that arc favored in the host cell in which the recombinant polypeptide will be produced.
• several small oligonucleotides coding for portions of the desired polypeptide may be synthesized and assembled by PCR, ligation or ligation chain reaction. See, e.g., Barany, el a/.. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 88: 189-193 (1991 ); U.S.
• non-natural amino acid methods and compositions described herein utilize techniques in the field of recombinant genetics.
• Basic texts disclosing the general methods of use for the non-natural amino acid methods and compositions described herein include Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual (3rd ed. 2001); Kriegler, Gene Transfer and Expression: A Laboratory Manual (1990); and Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (Ausubel et al., eds., 1994)).
• mutagenesis is used in the non-natural amino acid methods and compositions described herein for a variety of purposes, including but not limited to, to produce novel synthetases or tRNAs, to mutate tRNA molecules, to mutate polynucleotides encoding synthetases, libraries of tRNAs, to produce libraries of synthetases, to produce selector codons, to insert selector codons that encode non-natural amino acids in a protein or polypeptide of interest.
• mutagenesis include but are not limited to site-directed mutagenesis, ⁇ andom point mutagenesis, homologous recombination, DNA shuffling or other recursive mutagenesis methods, chimeric construction, mutagenesis using uracil containing templates, oligonucleotide-directed mutagenesis, phosphorothioate-modified DNA mutagenesis, mutagenesis using gapped duplex DNA or the like, or any combination thereof.
• Additional suitable methods include point mismatch repair, mutagenesis using repair- deficient host strains, restriction-selection and restriction-purification, deletion mutagenesis, mutagenesis by total gene synthesis, double-strand break repair, and the like.
• Mutagenesis including but not limited to, involving chimeric constructs, are also included in the non-natural amino acid methods and compositions described herein.
• mutagenesis can be guided by documented information of the naturally occurring molecule or altered or mutated naturally occurring molecule, including but not limited to, sequence comparisons, physical properties, crystal structure or the like.
• 00347J The texts and examples found herein describe these and other relevant procedures. Additional information is found in the following publications and references cited within: Ling et al., Approaches to DNA mutagenesis: an overview. Anal Biochem.
• the methods and compositions described herein also include use of eukaryotic host cells, non- eukaryotic host cells, and organisms for the in vivo incorporation of a non-natural amino acid via orthogonal tRNA/RS pairs.
• Host cells are genetically engineered (including but not limited to, transformed, transduced or transfected) with the polynucleotides corresponding to the polypeptides described herein or constructs which include a polynucleotide corresponding to the polypeptides described herein, including but not limited to, a vector corresponding to the polypeptides described herein, which can be, for example, a cloning vector or an expression vector.
• the coding regions for the orthogonal tRNA, the orthogonal tRNA synthetase, and the protein to be derivatized are operably linked to gene expression control elements that are functional in the desired host cell.
• the vector can be, for example, in the form of a plasmid, cosmid, a phage, a bacterium, a virus, a naked polynucleotide, or a conjugated polynucleotide.
• the vectors are introduced into cells and/or microorganisms by methods including electroporation (Fromm et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
• the engineered host cells can be cultured in conventional nutrient media modified as appropriate for such activities as, for example, screening steps, activating promoters or selecting trans formants. These cells can optionally be cultured into transgenic organisms.
• Several methods of introducing target nucleic acids into cells are available, any of which can be used in methods and compositions described herein. These include: fusion of the recipient cells with bacterial protoplasts containing the DNA, electroporation, projectile bombardment, and infection with viral vectors (discussed further, herein), etc.
• Bacterial cells can be used to amplify the number of plasmids containing DNA constructs corresponding to the polypeptides described herein. The bacteria are grown to log phase and the plasmids within the bacteria can be isolated by a variety of methods (see, for instance, Sambrook).
• kits are commercially available for the purification of plasmids from bacteria, (see, e.g., EasyPrepTM, FlexiPrepTM, both from Pharmacia Biotech; StrataCleanTM, from Stratagene; and, QIAprepTM from Qiagen).
• the isolated and purified plasmids are then further manipulated to produce other plasmids, used to transfect cells or incorporated into related vectors to infect organisms.
• Typical vectors contain transcription and translation terminators, transcription and translation initiation sequences, and promoters useful for regulation of the expression of the particular target nucleic acid.
• the vectors optionally comprise generic expression cassettes containing at least one independent terminator sequence, sequences permitting replication of the cassette in eukaryotes, or prokaryotes, or both, (including but not limited to, shuttle vectors) and selection markers for both prokaryotic and eukaryotic systems.
• Vectors are suitable for replication and integration in prokaryotes, eukaryotes, or preferably both. See, Gillam & Smith, Gene 8:81 (1979); Roberts, et al., Nature, 328:731 (1987); Schneider, E., et al., Protein Expr. Purif. 6(1): 10-14 (1995); Ausubel, Sambrook, Berger (all supra).
• a catalogue of bacteria and bacteriophages useful for cloning is provided, e.g., by the ATCC, e.g., The ATCC Catalogue of bacteria and bacteriophage (1992) Gherna et al. (eds) published by the ATCC. Additional basic procedures for sequencing, cloning and other aspects of molecular biology and underlying theoretical considerations are also found in Watson et al. (1992) Recombinant DNA Second Edition Scientific American Books, NY.
• nucleic acid and virtually any labeled nucleic acid, whether standard or non-standard
• Selector codons encompassed within the methods and compositions described herein expand the genetic codon framework of protein biosynthetic machinery.
• a selector codon includes, but is not limited to, a unique three base codon, a nonsense codon, such as a stop codon, including but not limited to, an amber codon (UAG), or an opal codon (UGA), a unnatural codon, a four or more base codon, a rare codon, or the like.
• selector codons that can be introduced into a desired gene or polynucleotide, including but not limited to, one or more, two or more, three or more, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more in a single polynucleotide encoding at least a portion of a polypeptide of interest.
• the methods involve the use of a selector codon that is a stop codon for the incorporation of one or more non-natural amino acids in vivo.
• a selector codon that is a stop codon for the incorporation of one or more non-natural amino acids in vivo.
• an O-tRNA is produced that recognizes the stop codon, including but not limited to, UAG, and is aminoacylated by an O-RS with a desired non-natural amino acid.
• This O-tRNA is not recognized by the naturally occurring host's aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases.
• Site-directed mutagenesis can be used to introduce the stop codon, including but not limited to, UAG, at the site of interest in a polypeptide of interest. See. e.g., Sayers, J.R., et al.
• Non-natural amino acids can also be encoded with rare codons.
• the rare arginine codon, AGG has proven to be efficient for insertion of Ala by a synthetic tRNA acylated with alanine. See, e.g., Ma et al., Biochemistry. 32:7939 (1993).
• the synthetic tRNA competes with the naturally occurring tRNAArg, which exists as a minor species in Escherichia coli. Some organisms do not use all triplet codons.
• the suppression efficiency for the UAG codon depends upon the competition between the O-tRNA, including but not limited to, the amber suppressor tRNA, and a eukaryotic release factor (including but not limited to, eRF) (which binds to a stop codon and initiates release of the growing peptide from the ribosome)
• the suppression efficiency can be modulated by, including but not limited to, increasing the expression level of O-tRNA, and/or the suppressor tRNA.
• Selector codons also comprise extended codons, including but not limited to, four or more base codons, such as, four, five, six or more base codons.
• four base codons include, but arc not limited to, AGGA, CUAG, UAGA, CCCU and the like.
• five base codons include, but are not limited to, AGGAC 1 CCCCU, CCCUC, CUAGA, CUACU, UAGGC and the like.
• a feature of the methods and compositions described herein includes using extended codons based on frameshift suppression.
• Four or more base codons can insert, including but not limited to, one or multiple non-natural amino acids into the same protein.
• the four or more base codon is read as single amino acid.
• the anticodon loops can decode, including but not limited to, at least a four-base codon, at least a five-base codon, or at least a six-base codon or more. Since there are 256 possible four-base codons, multiple non-natural amino acids can be encoded in the same cell using a four or more base codon. See, Anderson et al., (2002) Exploring the Limits of Codon and Anticodon Size, Chemistry and Biology.
• CGGG and AGGU were used to simultaneously incorporate 2- naphthylalanine and an NBD derivative of lysine into streptavidin in vitro with two chemically acylated frameshift suppressor tRNAs. See, e.g., Hohsaka et al., (1999) J. Am. Chem. Soc, 121:12194-12195.
• Moore et al. examined the ability of tRNALeu derivatives with NCUA anticodons to suppress UAGN codons (N can be U, A, G, or C), and found that the quadruplet UAGA can be decoded by a tRNALeu with a UCUA anticodon with an efficiency of 13 to 26% with little decoding in the 0 or -1 frame. See, Moore et al., (2000) J. MoI. Biol., 298: 195-205.
• extended codons based on rare codons or nonsense codons can be used in the methods and compositions described herein, which can reduce missense rcadthrough and frameshift suppression at other unwanted sites.
• a selector codon can also include one of the natural three base codons, where the endogenous system does not use (or rarely uses) the natural base codon. For example, this includes a system that is lacking a tRNA that recognizes the natural three base codon, and/or a system where the three base codon is a rare codon.
• Selector codons optionally include unnatural base pairs. These unnatural base pairs further expand the existing genetic alphabet. One extra base pair increases the number of triplet codons from 64 to 125.
• Properties of third base pairs include stable and selective base pairing, efficient enzymatic incorporation into DNA with high fidelity by a polymerase, and the efficient continued primer extension after synthesis of the nascent unnatural base pair.
• Descriptions of unnatural base pairs which can be adapted for methods and compositions include, e.g., Hirao, et al., (2002) An unnatural base pair for incorporating amino acid analogues into protein. Nature Biotechnology, 20: 177-182, and see also, Wu, Y., et. al. (2002) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 124: 14626-14630. Other relevant publications are listed herein.
• the unnatural nucleoside is membrane permeable and is phosphorylated to form the corresponding triphosphate.
• the increased genetic information is stable and not destroyed by cellular enzymes.
• Benner and others took advantage of hydrogen bonding patterns that are different from those in canonical Watson-Crick pairs, the most noteworthy example of which is the iso-C:iso-G pair. See, e.g., Switzer et al., (1989) J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1 1 1 :8322-8322; and Piccirilli et al., ( 1990) Nature, 343:33-37;
• a PICS:PICS self-pair is found to be more stable than natural base pairs, and can be efficiently incorporated into DNA by Klenow fragment of Escherichia coli DNA polymerase I (KF). See, e.g., McMinn et al., (1999) J. Am. Chem. Soc, 121:11585-11586; and Ogawa et al., (2000) J. Am. Chem. Soc, 122:3274-3278.
• a 3MN:3MN self- pair can be synthesized by KF with efficiency and selectivity sufficient for biological function. See, e.g., Ogawa et al., (2000) J. Am. Chem. Soc, 122:8803-8804. However, both bases act as a chain terminator for further replication. A mutant DNA polymerase has been recently evolved that can be used to replicate the PICS self pair. In addition, a 7AI self pair can be replicated. See, e.g., Tae et al., (2001) J. Am. Chem. Soc, 123:7439- 7440. A novel metallobase pair, Dipic:Py, has also been developed, which forms a stable pair upon binding Cu(Il).
• a translational bypassing system can also be used to incorporate a non-natural amino acid in a desired polypeptide.
• a large sequence is incorporated into a gene but is not translated into protein.
• the sequence contains a structure that serves as a cue to induce the ribosome to hop over the sequence and resume translation downstream of the insertion.
• the protein or polypeptide of interest (or portion thereof) in the methods and/or compositions described herein is encoded by a nucleic acid.
• the nucleic acid comprises at least one selector codon, at least two selector codons, at least three selector codons, at least four selector codons.
• Genes coding for proteins or polypeptides of interest can be mutagenized using, for example, methods described herein under "Mutagenesis and Other Molecular Biology Techniques" to include, for example, one or more selector codons for the incorporation of a non-natural amino acid.
• a nucleic acid for a protein of interest is mutagenized to include one or more selector codons, providing for the incorporation of the one or more non-natural amino acids.
• the methods and compositions described herein include any such variant, including but not limited to, mutant, versions of any protein, for example, including at least one non-natural amino acid.
• the methods and compositions described herein include corresponding nucleic acids, i.e., any nucleic acid with one or more selector codons that encodes or allows for the in vivo incorporation of one or more non-natural amino acid.
• Nucleic acid molecules encoding a polypeptide of interest including by way of example only, GH polypeptide may be readily mutated to introduce a cysteine at any desired position of the polypeptide. Cysteine is widely used to introduce reactive molecules, water soluble polymers, proteins, or a wide variety of other molecules, onto a protein of interest.
• Methods suitable for the incorporation of cysteine into a desired position of a polypeptide include those described in U.S. Patent No. 6,608,183, which is herein incorporated by reference for ⁇ ie aforementioned disclosure, and mutagenesis techniques.
• the use of such cysteine-introducing and utilizing techniques can be used in conjunction with the non-natural amino acid introducing and utilizing techniques described herein.
• polypeptides described herein can be generated in vivo using modified tRNA and tRNA synthetases to add to or substitute amino acids that are not encoded in naturally-occurring systems.
• 00366 Methods for generating tRNAs and tRNA synthetases which use amino acids that are not encoded in naturally-occurring systems are described in, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 7,045,337, entitled “in vivo incorporation of unnatural amino acids” and U.S. Patent No. 7,083,970, entitled “Methods and compositions for the production of orthogonal tRNA-aminoacyl tRNA synthetase pairs" which are incorporated by reference herein.
• the translation system comprises a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide; the polynucleotide can be mRNA that was transcribed from the corresponding DNA, or the mRNA may arise from an RNA viral vector; further the polynucleotide comprises a selector codon corresponding to the predesignated site of incorporation for the non-natural amino acid.
• the translation further comprises a tRNA comprising the non- natural amino acid, where the tRNA is specific to the aforementioned selector codon; in further embodiments, the non-natural amino acid is aminoacylated.
• the translation system comprises an aminoacyl synthetase specific for the tRNA, and in other or further embodiments, the translation system comprises an orthogonal tRNA and an orthogonal aminoacyl tRNA synthetase.
• the translation system comprises at least one of the following: a plasmid comprising the aforementioned polynucleotide (typically in the form of DNA), genomic DNA comprising the aforementioned polynucleotide (typically in the form of DNA), or genomic DNA into which the aforementioned polynucleotide has been integrated (in further embodiments, the integration is stable integration).
• the selector codon is selected from the group consisting of an amber codon, ochre codon, opal codon, a unique codon, a rare codon, an unnatural codon, a five-base codon, and a four-base codon.
• the tRNA is a suppressor tRNA.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide is synthesized by a ribosome.
• the translation system comprises an orthogonal tRNA (OtRNA) and an orthogonal aminoacyl tRNA synthetase (O-RS).
• OtRNA orthogonal tRNA
• O-RS orthogonal aminoacyl tRNA synthetase
• the O-RS preferentially aminoacylates the O- tRNA with at least one non-natural amino acid in the translation system and the OtRNA recognizes at least one selector codon that is not recognized by other tRNAs in the system.
• the translation system thus inserts the non- natural amino acid into a polypeptide produced in the system, in response to an encoded selector codon, thereby "substituting" a non-natural amino acid into a position in the encoded polypeptide.
• orthogonal tRNAs and aminoacyl tRNA synthetases for inserting particular synthetic amino acids into polypeptides are generally suitable for use in the methods described herein to produce the non- natural amino acid polypeptides described herein.
• keto-specific O-tRNA/aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases are described in Wang, L., et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 100( l):56-61 (2003) and Zhang, Z. et al., Biochem. 42(22):6735-6746 (2003).
• Exemplary O-RS, or portions thereof, are encoded by polynucleotide sequences and include amino acid sequences disclosed in U.S.
• Patent Nos. 7,045,337 and 7,083,970 each incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
• Corresponding O-tRNA molecules for use with the O-RSs are also described in U.S. Patent Nos. 7,045,337 and 7,083,970 which are incorporated by reference in their entirety herein.
• Mehl et al. in J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2003; 125:935-939 and Santoro et al. Nature Biotechnology 2002 Oct; 20:1044-1048 which are incorporated by reference in their entirety herein, discuss screening methods and aminoacyl tRNA synthetase and tRNA molecules for the incorporation of p- aminophenylalanine into polypeptides
• O-tRNA sequences suitable for use in the methods described herein include, but are not limited to, nucleotide sequences SEQ ID NOs: 1 or 2 as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 7,045,337 which is incorporated by reference herein.
• Other examples of O-tRNA/aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase pairs specific to particular non-natural amino acids are described in U.S. Patent No. 7,083,970 which is incorporated by reference in its entirety herein.
• O-RS and O-tRNA that incorporate both keto- and azide -containing amino acids in S. cerevisiae are described in Chin, J. W., et al., Science 301 :964-967 (2003).
• O-tRNA/aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases involves selection of a specific codon which encodes the non-natural amino acid. While any codon can be used, it is generally desirable to select a codon that is rarely or never used in the cell in which the O-tRNA/aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase is expressed.
• exemplary codons include nonsense codon such as stop codons (amber, ochre, and opal), four or more base codons and other natural three-base codons that are rarely or unused.
• Specific selector codon(s) can be introduced into appropriate positions in the polynucleotide coding sequence using mutagenesis methods (including but not limited to, site-specific mutagenesis, cassette mutagenesis, restriction selection mutagenesis, etc.).
• WO 04/094593 entitled “Expanding the Eukaryotic Genetic Code,” which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety, describes orthogonal RS and tRNA pairs for the incorporation of non-naturally encoded amino acids in eukaryotic host cells.
• Methods for producing at least one recombinant orthogonal aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase comprise: (a) generating a library of (optionally mutant) RSs derived from at least one aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (RS) from a first organism, including but not limited to, a prokaryotic organism, such as, by way of example only, Methanococcus jannaschii, Methanobactenum thermoautotrophicum, Halobacterium, Escherichia coli, A. fiilgidus, P. fitriosus, P. horikoshii, A. pernix, T.
• a prokaryotic organism such as, by way of example only, Methanococcus jannaschii, Methanobactenum thermoautotrophicum, Halobacterium, Escherichia coli, A. fiilgidus, P. fitriosus, P. horikoshii, A. pernix, T.
• thermophilus or the like, or a eukaryotic organism; (b) selecting (and/or screening) the library of RSs (optionally mutant RSs) for members that aminoacylate an orthogonal tRNA (O-tRNA) in the presence of a non-natural amino acid and a natural amino acid, thereby providing a pool of active (optionally mutant) RSs; and/or, (c) selecting (optionally through negative selection) the pool for active RSs (including but not limited to, mutant RSs) that preferentially aminoacylate the O-tRNA in the absence of the non-natural amino acid, thereby providing the at least one recombinant O-RS; wherein the at least one recombinant O-RS preferentially aminoacylates the O-tRNA with the non-natural amino acid.
• O-tRNA orthogonal tRNA
• the RS is an inactive RS.
• the inactive RS can be generated by mutating an active RS.
• the inactive RS can be generated by mutating at least about 1, at least about 2, at least about 3, at least about 4, at least about 5, at least about 6, or at least about 10 or more amino acids to different amino acids, including but not limited to, alanine.
• mutant RSs can be generated using various techniques, including but not limited to rational design based on protein three dimensional RS structure, or mutagenesis of RS nucleotides in a random or rational design technique.
• the mutant RSs can be generated by site-specific mutations, random mutations, diversity generating recombination mutations, chimeric constructs, rational design and by other methods described herein.
• selecting (and/or screening) the library of RSs (optionally mutant RSs) for members that are active, including but not limited to, those which aminoacylate an orthogonal tRNA (O-tRNA) in the presence of a non-natural amino acid and a natural amino acid includes, but is not limited to: introducing a positive selection or screening marker, including but not limited to, an antibiotic resistance gene, or the like, and the library of (optionally mutant) RSs into a plurality of cells, wherein the positive selection and/or screening marker comprises at least one selector codon, including but not limited to, an amber codon, ochre codon, opal codon, a unique codon, a rare codon, an unnatural codon, a five-base codon, and a four-base codon; growing the plurality of cells in the presence of a selection agent; identifying cells that survive (or show a specific response) in the presence of the selection and/or screening agent by suppressing the at least one
• the selection and/or screening agent concentration can be varied.
• the positive selection marker is a chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT) gene and the selector codon is an amber stop codon in the CAT gene. Additional selection markers include, but are not limited to, a neomycin resistance gene, a blasticidin resistance gene, a hygromycin resistance gene, or any other available resistance genes.
• the positive selection marker is a ⁇ -lactamase gene and the selector codon is an amber stop codon in the ⁇ -lactamase gene.
• the positive screening marker comprises a fluorescent or luminescent screening marker or an affinity based screening marker (including but not limited to, a cell surface marker).
• negatively selecting or screening the pool for active RSs (optionally mutants) including, but not limited to, those which preferentially aminoacylate the O-tRNA in the absence of the non- natural amino acid includes, but is not limited to: introducing a negative selection or screening marker with the pool of active (optionally mutant) RSs from the positive selection or screening into a plurality of cells of a second organism, wherein the negative selection or screening marker comprises at least one selector codon (including but not limited to, an antibiotic resistance gene, including but not limited to, a chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT) gene); and, identifying cells that survive or show a specific screening response in a first medium supplemented with the non-natural amino acid and a screening or selection agent, but fail to survive or to show the specific response in a second medium not supplemented with CAT
• a CAT identification protocol optionally acts as a positive selection and/or a negative screening in determination of appropriate O-RS recombinants.
• a pool of clones is optionally replicated on growth plates containing CAT (which comprises at least one selector codon) either with or without one or more non-natural amino acid. Colonies growing exclusively on the plates containing non-natural amino acids are thus regarded as containing recombinant O-RS.
• the concentration of the selection (and/or screening) agent is varied.
• the first and second organisms are different.
• the first and/or second organism optionally comprises: a prokaryote, a eukaryote, a mammal, an Escherichia coli, a fungi, a yeast, an archaebacterium, a eubacterium, a plant, an insect, a protist, etc.
• the screening marker comprises a fluorescent or luminescent screening marker or an affinity based screening marker.
• screening or selecting (including but not limited to, negatively selecting) the pool for active (optionally mutant) RSs includes, but is not limited to: isolating the pool of active mutant RSs from the positive selection step (b); introducing a negative selection or screening marker, wherein the negative selection or screening marker comprises at least one selector codon (including but not limited to, a toxic marker gene, including but not limited to, a ribonuclease barnase gene, comprising at least one selector codon), and the pool of active (optionally mutant) RSs into a plurality of cells of a second organism; and identifying cells that survive or show a specific screening response in a first medium not supplemented with the non-natural amino acid, but fail to survive or show a specific screening response in a second medium supplemented with the non- natural amino acid, thereby providing surviving or screened cells with the at least one recombinant O-RS, wherein the at least one recombinant O-RS is specific
• the at least one selector codon comprises about two or more selector codons.
• Such embodiments optionally can include wherein the at least one selector codon comprises two or more selector codons, and wherein the first and second organism are different (including but not limited to, each organism is optionally, including but not limited to, a prokaryote, a eukaryote, a mammal, an Escherichia coli, a fungi, a yeast, an archaebacteria, a eubacteria, a plant, an insect, a protist, etc.).
• the negative selection marker comprises a ribonuclease barnase gene (which comprises at least one selector codon).
• the screening marker optionally comprises a fluorescent or luminescent screening marker or an affinity based screening marker.
• the screenings and/or selections optionally include variation of the screening and/or selection stringency.
• the methods for producing at least one recombinant orthogonal aminoacyl- tRNA synthetase may further comprise: (d) isolating the at least one recombinant O-RS; (e) generating a second set of O-RS (optionally mutated) derived from the at least one recombinant O-RS; and, (f) repeating steps (b) and (c) until a mutated O-RS is obtained that comprises an ability to preferentially aminoacylate the O- tRNA.
• steps (d)-(f) are repeated, including but not limited to, at least about two times.
• the second-set of mutated O-RS derived from at least one recombinant O-RS can be generated by mutagenesis, including but not limited to, random mutagenesis, site-specific mutagenesis, recombination or a combination thereof.
• mutagenesis including but not limited to, random mutagenesis, site-specific mutagenesis, recombination or a combination thereof.
• the stringency of the selection/screening steps including but not limited to, the positive selection/screening step (b), the negative selection/screening step (c) or both the positive and negative selection/screening steps (b) and (c), in the above-described methods, optionally includes varying the selection/screening stringency.
• the positive selection/screening step (b), the negative selection/screening step (c) or both the positive and negative selection/screening steps (b) and (c) comprise using a reporter, wherein the reporter is detected by fluorescence-activated cell sorting (FACS) or wherein the reporter is detected by luminescence.
• FACS fluorescence-activated cell sorting
• the reporter is displayed on a cell surface, on a phage display or the like and selected based upon affinity or catalytic activity involving the non-natural amino acid or an analogue.
• the mutated synthetase is displayed on a cell surface, on a phage display or the like.
• Methods for producing a recombinant orthogonal tRNA include, but are not limited to: (a) generating a library of mutant tRNAs derived from at least one tRNA, including but not limited to, a suppressor tRNA, from a first organism; (b) selecting (including but not limited to, negatively selecting) or screening the library for (optionally mutant) tRNAs that are aminoacylated by an aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (RS) from a second organism in the absence of a RS from the first organism, thereby providing a pool of tRNAs (optionally mutant); and, (c) selecting or screening the pool of tRNAs (optionally mutant) for members that are aminoacylated by an introduced orthogonal RS (O-RS), thereby providing at least one recombinant O-tRNA; wherein the at least one recombinant O-tRNA recognizes.
• RS aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase
• the at least one tRNA is a suppressor tRNA and/or comprises a unique three base codon of natural and/or unnatural bases, or is a nonsense codon, a rare codon, an unnatural codon, a codon comprising at least 4 bases, an amber codon, an ochre codon, or an opal stop codon.
• the recombinant O-tRNA possesses an improvement of orthogonality. It will be appreciated that in some embodiments, O-tRNA is optionally imported into a first organism from a second organism without the need for modification.
• the first and second organisms are either the same or different and are optionally chosen from, including but not limited to, prokaryotes (including but not limited to, Methanococcus jannaschii, Methanobacterium thermoautotrophicum, Escherichia coli, Halobacterium, etc.), eukaryotes, mammals, fungi, yeasts, archaebacteria, eubacteria, plants, insects, protists, etc.
• the recombinant tRNA is optionally aminoacylated by a non-natural amino acid, wherein the non-natural amino acid is biosynthesized in vivo either naturally or through genetic manipulation.
• selecting includes: introducing a toxic marker gene, wherein the toxic marker gene comprises at least one of the selector codons (or a gene that leads to the production of a toxic or static agent or a gene essential to the organism wherein such marker gene comprises at least one selector codon) and the library of (optionally mutant) tRNAs into a plurality of cells from the second organism; and, selecting surviving cells, wherein the surviving cells contain the pool of (optionally mutant) tRNAs comprising at least one orthogonal tRNA or nonfunctional tRNA.
• surviving cells can be selected by using a comparison ratio cell density assay.
• 00384 the toxic marker gene can include two or more selector codons.
• the toxic marker gene is a ribonuclease barnase gene, where the ribonuclease barnase gene comprises at least one amber codon.
• the ribonuclease barnase gene can include two or more amber codons.
• selecting or screening the pool of (optionally mutant) tRNAs for members that are aminoacylated by an introduced orthogonal RS can include: introducing a positive selection or screening marker gene, wherein the positive marker gene comprises a drug resistance gene (including but not limited to, ⁇ -lactamase gene, comprising at least one of the selector codons, such as at least one amber stop codon) or a gene essential to the organism, or a gene that leads to detoxification of a toxic agent, along with the O-RS, and the pool of (optionally mutant) tRNAs into a plurality of cells from the second organism; and, identifying surviving or screened cells grown in the presence of a selection or screening agent, including but not limited to, an antibiotic, thereby providing a pool of cells possessing the at least one recombinant tRNA, where the at least one recombinant tRNA is aminoacylated by the O-RS and inserts an amino acid into a translation product
• a selection or screening marker gene comprising a
• Methods for generating specific O-tRNA/O-RS pairs include, but are not limited to: (a) generating a library of mutant tRNAs derived from at least one tRNA from a first organism; (b) negatively selecting or screening the library for (optionally mutant) tRNAs that are aminoacylated by an aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (RS) from a second organism in the absence of a RS from the first organism, thereby providing a pool of (optionally mutant) tRNAs; (c) selecting or screening the pool of (optionally mutant) tRNAs for members that are aminoacylated by an introduced orthogonal RS (O-RS), thereby providing at least one recombinant O-tRNA.
• RS aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase
• the at least one recombinant O-tRNA recognizes a selector codon and is not efficiently recognized by the RS from the second organism and is preferentially aminoacylated by the O-RS.
• the method also includes (d) generating a library of (optionally mutant) RSs derived from at least one aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (RS) from a third organism; (e) selecting or screening the library of mutant RSs for members that preferentially aminoacylate the at least one recombinant O-tRNA in the presence of a non-natural amino acid and a natural amino acid, thereby providing a pool of active (optionally mutant) RSs; and, (f) negatively selecting or screening the pool for active (optionally mutant) RSs that preferentially aminoacylate the at least one recombinant O-tRNA in the absence of the non-natural amino acid, thereby providing the at least one specific O-tRNA/O-RS pair, wherein the at least one specific O-tRNA/O-RS
• the specific O-tRNA/O-RS pair can include, including but not limited to, a mutRNATyr-mutTyrRS pair, such as a mutRNATyr-SS12TyrRS pair, a mutRNALeu-mutLeuRS pair, a mutRNAThr-mutThrRS pair, a mutRNAGlu-mutGIuRS pair, or the like.
• a mutRNATyr-mutTyrRS pair such as a mutRNATyr-SS12TyrRS pair, a mutRNALeu-mutLeuRS pair, a mutRNAThr-mutThrRS pair, a mutRNAGlu-mutGIuRS pair, or the like.
• such methods include wherein the first and third organism are the same (including but not limited to, Methanococcus jannaschii).
• Methods for selecting an orthogonal tRNA-tRNA synthetase pair for use in an in vivo translation system of a second organism are also included in the methods described herein.
• the methods include, but are not limited to: introducing a marker gene, a tRNA and an aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (RS) isolated or derived from a first organism into a first set of cells from the second organism; introducing the marker gene and the tRNA into a duplicate cell set from a second organism; and, selecting for surviving cells in the first set that fail to survive in the duplicate cell set or screening for cells showing a specific screening response that fail to give such response in the duplicate cell set, wherein the first set and the duplicate cell set are grown in the presence of a selection or screening agent, wherein the surviving or screened cells comprise the orthogonal tRNA-tRNA synthetase pair for use in the in the in vivo translation system of the second organism.
• RS aminoacyl-tRNA synthetas
• comparing and selecting or screening includes an in vivo complementation assay.
• the concentration of the selection or screening agent can be varied.
• the organisms described herein comprise a variety of organism and a variety of combinations.
• the organisms are optionally a prokaryotic organism, including but not limited to, Methanococcus jannaschii, Methanobacterium thermoautotrophicum, Halobacterium, Escherichia colt, A. fitlgidus, P. furiosus, P. horikoshii, A. pernix, T. thermophilus, or the like.
• the organisms are a eukaryotic organism, including but not limited to, plants (including but not limited to, complex plants such as monocots, or dicots), algae, protists, fungi (including but not limited to, yeast, etc), animals (including but not limited to, mammals, insects, arthropods, etc.), or the like.
• a eukaryotic host cell or non-eukaryotic host cell as described herein provides the ability to synthesize polypeptides which comprise non-natural amino acids in large useful quantities.
• the composition optionally includes, but is not limited to, at least 10 micrograms, at least 50 micrograms, at least 75 micrograms, at least 100 micrograms, at least 200 micrograms, at least 250 micrograms, at least 500 micrograms, at least 1 milligram, at least 10 milligrams, at least 100 milligrams, at least one gram, or more of the polypeptide that comprises a non-natural amino acid, or an amount that can be achieved with in vivo polypeptide production methods (details on recombinant protein production and purification are provided herein).
• the polypeptide is optionally present in the composition at a concentration of, including but not limited to, at least 10 micrograms of polypeptide per liter, at least 50 micrograms of polypeptide per liter, at least 75 micrograms of polypeptide per liter, at least 100 micrograms of polypeptide per liter, at least 200 micrograms of polypeptide per liter, at least 250 micrograms of polypeptide per liter, at least 500 micrograms of polypeptide per liter, at least 1 milligram of polypeptide per liter, or at least 10 milligrams of polypeptide per liter or more, in, including but not limited to, a cell lysate, a buffer, a pharmaceutical buffer, or other liquid suspension (including but not limited to, in a volume of anywhere from about 1 nl to about 100 L or more).
• a eukaryotic host cell or non-eukaryotic host cell as described herein provides the ability to biosynthesize polypeptides that comprise non-natural amino acids in large useful quantities.
• polypeptides comprising a non-natural amino acid can be produced at a concentration of, including but not limited to, at least 10 ⁇ g/liter, at least 50 ⁇ g/liter, at least 75 ⁇ g/liter, at least 100 ⁇ g/liter, at least 200 ⁇ g/liter, at least 250 ⁇ g/liter, or at least 500 ⁇ g/liter, at least lmg/Iiter, at least 2mg/liter, at least 3 mg/liter, at least 4 mg/liter, at least 5 mg/liter, at least 6 mg/liter, at least 7 mg/liter, at least 8 mg/liter, at least 9 mg/liter, at least 10 mg/liter, at least 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 300, 400. 500, 600, 700, 800, 900
• Non-natural amino acid polypeptides may be expressed in any number of suitable expression systems including, but not limited to, yeast, insect cells, mammalian cells, and bacteria.
• yeast i.e., the expression construct has been introduced into the host cell and host cells with the proper expression construct are isolated
• the recombinant host cell strain is cultured under conditions appropriate for production of polypeptides. The method of culture of the recombinant host cell strain will be dependent on the nature of the expression construct utilized and the identity of the host cell.
• Recombinant host strains are normally cultured using documented methodologies.
• Recombinant host cells are typically cultured in liquid medium containing assimilatable sources of carbon, nitrogen, and inorganic salts and, optionally, containing vitamins, amino acids, growth factors, and other protcinaceous culture supplements.
• Liquid media for culture of host cells may optionally contain antibiotics or anti-fungals to prevent the growth of undesirable microorganisms and/or compounds including, but not limited to, antibiotics to select for host cells containing the expression vector.
• Recombinant host cells may be cultured in batch or continuous formats, with either cell harvesting (in the case where the desired polypeptide accumulates intracellularly) or harvesting of culture supernatant in either batch or continuous formats.
• cells can be propagated in vitro in a variety of modes including, but not limited to, non-anchorage dependent cells growing in suspension throughout the bulk of the culture or as anchorage-dependent cells requiring attachment to a solid substrate for their propagation (i.e., a monolayer type of cell growth).
• Non-anchorage dependent or suspension cultures from continuous established cell lines are the most widely used means of large scale production of cells and cell products.
• cell type and propagation mode may be selected based on a variety of production considerations as described above.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein are purified after expression in recombinant systems.
• the polypeptides may be purified from host cells or culture medium by a variety of documented methodologies. Normally, many polypeptides produced in bacterial host cells are poorly soluble or insoluble (in the form of inclusion bodies).
• amino acid substitutions are readily made in the polypeptides that are selected for the purpose of increasing the solubility of the recombinantly produced polypeptide utilizing the methods disclosed herein.
• the polypeptides may be collected from host cell lysates by centrifugation or filtering and may further be followed by homogenization of the cells.
• polyethylene imine may be added to induce the precipitation of partially soluble polypeptides.
• the precipitated polypeptides may then be conveniently collected by centrifugation or filtering.
• Recombinant host cells may be disrupted or homogenized to release the inclusion bodies from within the cells using documented methods. Host cell disruption or homogenization may be performed using well documented methodologies including, but not limited to, enzymatic cell disruption, sonication, dounce homogenization, or high pressure release disruption. In one embodiment of the methods described and encompassed herein, the high pressure release technique is used to disrupt the E. coli host cells to release the inclusion bodies of the polypeptides.
• Insoluble or precipitated polypeptides may then be sohibilized using any of a number of documented suitable solubilization agents.
• the polypeptides are solubilized with urea or guanidine hydrochloride.
• the volume of the solubilized polypeptides should be minimized so that large batches may be produced using conveniently manageable batch sizes. This factor may be significant in a large-scale commercial setting where the recombinant host may be grown in batches that are thousands of liters in volume.
• the avoidance of harsh chemicals that can damage the machinery and container, or the polypeptide product itself should be avoided, if possible.
• the milder denaturing agent urea can be used to solubilize the polypeptide inclusion bodies in place of the harsher denaturing agent guanidine hydrochloride.
• the use of urea significantly reduces the risk of damage to stainless steel equipment utilized in the manufacturing and purification process of a polypeptide while efficiently solubilizing the polypeptide inclusion bodies.
• the peptides may be secreted into the pcriplasmic space or into the culture medium.
• soluble peptides may be present in the cytoplasm of the host cells.
• the soluble peptide may be concentrated prior to performing purification steps, documented methodologies, including but not limited to those described herein, may be used to concentrate soluble peptide from, by way of example, cell lysates or culture medium. In addition, documented methodologies, including but not limited to those described herein, may be used to disrupt host cells and release soluble peptide from the cytoplasm or periplasmic space of the host cells.
• the fusion sequence is preferably removed. Removal of a fusion sequence may be accomplished by methods including, but not limited to, enzymatic or chemical cleavage, wherein enzymatic cleavage is preferred. Enzymatic removal of fusion sequences may be accomplished using documented methodologies. The choice of enzyme for removal of the fusion sequence will be determined by the identity of the fusion, and the reaction conditions will be specified by the choice of enzyme. Chemical cleavage may be accomplished using reagents, including but not limited to, cyanogen bromide, TEV protease, and other reagents. The cleaved polypeptide is optionally purified from the cleaved fusion sequence by documented methodologies.
• Methods for purification may include, but are not limited to, size- exclusion chromatography, hydrophobic interaction chromatography, ion-exchange chromatography or dialysis or any combination thereof.
• The polypeptide is also optionally purified to remove DNA from the protein solution.
• DNA may be removed by documented methodologies, including, but not limited to, precipitation or ion exchange chromatography. In one embodiment, DNA is removed by precipitation with a nucleic acid precipitating agent, such as, but not limited to, protamine sulfate.
• the polypeptide may be separated from die precipitated DNA using documented methodologies including, but not limited to, centrifugation or filtration.
• Methods for small-scale or large-scale fermentation may also be used in protein expression, including but not limited to, fermentors, shake flasks, fluidized bed bioreactors, hollow fiber bioreactors, roller bottle culture systems, and stirred tank bioreactor systems. Each of these methods can be performed in a batch, fed- batch, or continuous mode process.
• Non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein can generally be recovered using documented methodologies. For example, culture medium or cell lysate can be centrifuged or filtered to remove cellular debris. The supernatant may be concentrated or diluted to a desired volume or diafiltered into a suitable buffer to condition the preparation for further purification. Further purification of the non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein include, but are not limited to, separating deamidated and clipped forms of a polypeptide variant from the corresponding intact form.
• Polypeptides encompassed within the methods and compositions described herein, including but not limited to, polypeptides comprising non-natural amino acids, antibodies to polypeptides comprising non-natural amino acids, binding partners for polypeptides comprising non-natural amino acids, may be purified, either partially or substantially to homogeneity, according to documented methodologies.
• polypeptides described herein may be recovered and purified by documented methodologies, including but not limited to, ammonium sulfate or ethanol precipitation, acid or base extraction, column chromatography, affinity column chromatography, anion or cation exchange chromatography, phosphocellulose chromatography, hydrophobic interaction chromatography, hydroxylapatite chromatography, lectin chromatography, gel electrophoresis and any combination thereof.
• Protein refolding steps can be used, as desired, in making correctly folded mature proteins.
• High performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), affinity chromatography or other suitable methods can be employed in final purification steps where high purity is desired.
• antibodies made against non-natural amino acids are used as purification reagents, including but not limited to, for affinity-based purification of polypeptides comprising one or more non-natural amino acid(s).
• the polypeptides are optionally used for a wide variety of utilities, including but not limited to, as assay components, therapeutics, prophylaxis, diagnostics, research reagents, and/or as immunogens for antibody production.
• polypeptides comprising at least one non-natural amino acid in a eukaryotic host cell or non-eukaryotic host cell is that typically the polypeptides will be folded in their native conformations.
• the polypeptides after synthesis, expression and/or purification, may possess a conformation different from the desired conformations of the relevant polypeptides.
• the expressed protein is optionally denatured and then renarured.
• This optional denaturation and renaturation is accomplished utilizing documented methodologies, including but not limited to, by adding a cliaperonin to the polypeptide of interest, and by solubilizing the polypeptides in a chaotropic agent including, but not limited to, guanidine HCl, and utilizing protein disulfide isomerase.
• Debinski, et al. describe the denaturation and reduction of inclusion body proteins in guanidine-DTE.
• the proteins can be refolded in a redox buffer containing, including but not limited to, oxidized glutathione and L-arginine.
• Refolding reagents can be flowed or otherwise moved into contact with the one or more polypeptide or other expression product, or vice-versa.
• the polypeptide thus produced may be misfolded and thus lacks or has reduced biological activity. The bioactivity of the protein may be restored by "refolding".
• a misfolded polypeptide is refolded by solubilizing (where the polypeptide is also insoluble), unfolding and reducing the polypeptide chain using, by way of example, one or more chaotropic agents (including , but not limited to, urea and/or guanidine) and a reducing agent capable of reducing disulfide bonds (including , but not limited to, dithiothreitol, DTT or 2-mercaptoethanol, 2-ME).
• chaotropic agents including , but not limited to, urea and/or guanidine
• a reducing agent capable of reducing disulfide bonds including , but not limited to, dithiothreitol, DTT or 2-mercaptoethanol, 2-ME.
• an oxidizing agent is then added (including, but not limited to, oxygen, cystine or cystamine), which allows the reformation of disulfide bonds.
• An unfolded or misfolded polypeptide may be refolded using documented methodologies, such as those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,51 1,502, 4,51 1,503, and 4,512,922, each of which is herein incorporated by reference for the aforementioned disclosure.
• the polypeptide may also be cofolded with other proteins to form heterodimers or heteromultimers.
• the polypeptide is optionally further purified.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides may be exchanged into different buffers and/or concentrated by-documented methodologies, including, but not limited to, diafiltration and dialysis.
• the purified non-natural amino acid polypeptides may be at least 90% pure (as measured by reverse phase high performance liquid chromatography, RP-HPLC, or sodium dodecyl sulfate-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, SDS-PAGE). In certain other embodiments the purified non-natural amino acid polypeptides may be at least 95% pure, or at least 98% pure, or at least 99% or greater purity.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides is sufficiently pure for use as a pharmaceutical product or for further processing, including but not limited to, conjugation with a water soluble polymer such as PEG.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides molecules may be used as therapeutic agents in the absence of other active ingredients or proteins (other than excipients, carriers, and stabilizers, serum albumin and the like), and in certain embodiments the non-natural amino acid polypeptides molecules they may be complexed with another polypeptide or a polymer.
• a wide variety of methods and procedures can be used to assess the yield and purity of a polypeptide containing one or more non-natural amino acids, including but not limited to, SDS-PAGE coupled with protein staining methods, immunoblotting, mass spectrometry, matrix assisted laser desorption/ionization-mass spectrometry (MALDI-MS), liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry, isoelectric focusing, analytical anion exchange, chromatofocusi ⁇ g, and circular dichroism.
• methods and procedures for characterizing proteins include, but are not limited to, the Bradford assay, SDS-PAGE, and silver stained SDS- PAGE 1 coomassie stained SDS-PAGE.
• Endotoxins are lipopoly-saccharides (LPSs) which are located on the outer membrane of Gram- negative host cells, such as, for example, Escherichia coli.
• LPSs lipopoly-saccharides
• Methods for reducing endotoxin levels include, but are not limited to, purification techniques using silica supports, glass powder or hydroxyapatite, reverse-phase, affinity, size-exclusion, anion-exchange chromatography, hydrophobic interaction chromatography, a combination of these methods, and the like. Modifications or additional methods may be required to remove contaminants such as co-migrating proteins from the polypeptide of interest.
• Methods for measuring endotoxin levels include, but are not limited to, Limulus Amebocyte Lysate (LAL) assays.
• LAL Limulus Amebocyte Lysate
• amino acids of Formulas I-XV may be biosynthetically incorporated into polypeptides, thereby making non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• such amino acids are incorporated at a specific site within the polypeptide.
• such amino acids incorporated into the polypeptide using a translation system.
• such translation systems comprise: (i) a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a selector codon corresponding to the pre-designated site of incorporation of the above amino acids, and (ii) a tRNA comprising the amino acid, wherein the tRNA is specific to the selector codon.
• the polynucleotide is mRNA produced in the translation system.
• the translation system comprises a plasmid or a phage comprising the polynucleotide.
• the translation system comprises genomic DNA comprising the polynucleotide.
• the polynucleotide is stably integrated into the genomic DNA.
• the translation system comprises tRNA specific for a selector codon selected from the group consisting of an amber codon, ochre codon, opal codon, a unique codon, a rare codon, an unnatural codon, a five-base codon, and a four-base codon.
• the tRNA is a suppressor tRNA.
• the translation system comprises a tRNA that is aminoacylated to the amino acids above.
• the translation system comprises an aminoacyl synthetase specific for the tRNA. In other embodiments of such translation systems, the translation system comprises an orthogonal tRNA and an orthogonal aminoacyl tRNA synthetase. In other embodiments of such translation systems, the polypeptide is synthesized by a ribosome, and in further embodiments the translation system is an in vivo translation system comprising a cell selected from the group consisting of a bacterial cell, archeaebacterial cell, and eukaryotic cell.
• the cell is an Escherichia coli cell, yeast cell, a cell from a species of Pseudomonas, mammalian cell, plant cell, or an insect cell.
• the translation system is an in vitro translation system comprising cellular extract from a bacterial cell, archeaebacterial cell, or eukaryotic cell.
• the cellular exffact is from an Escherichia coli cell, a cell from a species of Pseudomonas, yeast cell, mammalian cell, plant cell, or an insect cell.
• polypeptide is synthesized by solid phase or solution phase peptide synthesis, or a combination thereof, while in other embodiments further comprise hgating the polypeptide to another polypeptide.
• amino acids of Formulas I-XV including any sub-formulas or specific compounds that fall within the scope of Formulas I-XV, may be biosynthetically incorporated into polypeptides, wherein the polypeptide is a protein homologous to a therapeutic protein.
• polypeptides of interest may include eukaryotic post-rranslational modifications.
• a polypeptide includes at least one non-natural amino acid and at least one post-translational modification that is made in vivo by a eukaryotic cell, where the post-translational modification is not made by a prokaryotic cell.
• the post-translation modification includes, including but not limited to, acetylation, acylation, lipid- modification, palmitoylation, palmitate addition, phosphorylation, glycolipid-linkage modification, glycosylation, and the like.
• the post-translational modification includes attachment of an oligosaccharide (including but not limited to, (GlcNAc-Man) 2 -Man-GlcNAc-GlcNAc)) to an asparagine by a GlcNAc-asparagine linkage.
• an oligosaccharide including but not limited to, (GlcNAc-Man) 2 -Man-GlcNAc-GlcNAc)
• GlcNAc-asparagine linkage See Table 1 which lists some examples of N-linked oligosaccharides of eukaryotic proteins (additional residues can also be present, which are not shown).
• the post-translational modification includes attachment of an oligosaccharide (including but not limited to, GaI-GaINAc, GaI- GIcNAc, etc.) to a serine or threonine by a GalNAc-serine or GalNAc-threonine linkage, or a GIcNAc -serine or a GlcNAc-threonine linkage.
• an oligosaccharide including but not limited to, GaI-GaINAc, GaI- GIcNAc, etc.
• the post-translation modification includes proteolytic processing of precursors (including but not limited to, calcitonin precursor, calcitonin genc-rclated peptide precursor, preproparathyroid hormone, preproinsulin, proinsulin, prepro-opionielanocortin, proopiomelanocortin and the like), assembly into a multisubunit protein or macromolecular assembly, translation to another site in the cell (including but not limited to, to organelles, such as the endoplasmic reticulum, the golgi apparatus, the nucleus, lysosomes, peroxisomes, mitochondria, chloroplasts, vacuoles, etc., or through the secretory pathway).
• the protein comprises a secretion or localization sequence, an epitope tag, a FLAG tag, a polyhistidine tag, a GST fusion, or the like.
• non-natural amino acid presents additional chemical moieties that can be used to add additional molecules. These modifications can be made in vivo in a eukaryotic or non-eukaryotic cell, or in vitro.
• the post-translational modification is through the non-natural amino acid.
• the post-translational modification can be through a nucleophilic-electrophilic reaction.
• Most reactions currently used for the selective modification of proteins involve covalent bond formation between nucleophilic and electrophilic reaction partners, including but not limited to the reaction of ⁇ -haloketones with histidine or cysteine side chains. Selectivity in these cases is determined by the number and accessibility of the nucleophilic residues in the protein.
• Post-translational modifications including but not limited to, through an azido amino acid, can also made through the Staudinger ligation (including but not limited to, with triarylphosphine reagents). See, e.g.. Kiick et al., (2002) Incorporation of azides into recombinant proteins for chemoselective modification by the Staudinger ligtation, PNAS 99( 1 ): 19-24.
• post-translational modifications of non-natural amino acid components of a polypeptide described in this section should not be limited to just the generic descriptions or specific example provided in this section, but rather the post-translational modifications of non-natural amino acid components of a polypeptide described in this section apply equally well to all compounds that fall within the scope of Formulas I-XV and compounds having the structures 1 -4, including any sub-formulas or specific compounds that fall within the scope of Fo ⁇ nulas I-XV and compounds having the structures 1-4, that are described in the specification, claims and figures herein.
• the methods, compositions, reaction mixtures, techniques and strategies described herein are not limited to non-natural amino acid polypeptides formed by in vivo protein translation techniques, but includes non-natural amino acid polypeptides formed by any technique, including by way of example only expressed protein ligation, chemical synthesis, ribozyme-based techniques (see, e.g., section herein entitled "Expression in Alternate Systems").
• the naturally occurring amino acids do not (a) contain carbonyl groups that can react with hydrazine groups to form indole linkage and (b) hydrazine groups that can react with carbonyl groups to form indole linkages, and thus reagents designed to form such linkages will react site-specifically with the non-natural amino acid component of the polypeptide (assuming of course that the non-natural amino acid and the corresponding reagent have been designed to form such a linkage), thus the ability to site-selectively derivatize proteins provides a single homogeneous product as opposed to the mixtures of derivatized proteins produced using documented methodologies.
• the stability of the resulting indole linkage can be manipulated based on the identity (i.e., the functional groups and/or structure) of the non-natural amino acid to which the indole linkage has been formed.
• the indole linkage to the non-natural amino acid polypeptide has a decomposition half life less than one hour, in other embodiments less than 1 day, in other embodiments less than 2 days, in other embodiments less than 1 week and in other embodiments more than 1 week.
• the resulting indole linkage is stable for at least two weeks under mildly acidic conditions, in other embodiments the resulting indole linkage is stable for at least 5 days under mildly acidic conditions.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide is stable for at least 1 day in a pH between about 2 and about 8; in other embodiments, from a pH of about 2 to about 6; in other embodiment, in a pH of about 2 to about 4.
• an indole linkage to a non-natural amino acid polypeptide is synthesized with a decomposition half-life tuned to the situation at hand (e.g., for a therapeutic use such as sustained release, or a diagnostic use, or an industrial use or a military use).
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides described above are useful for, including but not limited to, novel therapeutics, diagnostics, catalytic enzymes, industrial enzymes, binding proteins (including but not limited to, antibodies and antibody fragments), and including but not limited to, the study of protein structure and function. See,- e.g., Dougherty, (2000) Unnatural Amino Acids as Probes of Protein Structure and Function, Current Opinion in Chemical Biology. 4:645-652.
• Other uses for the non-natural amino acid polypeptides described above include, by way of example only, assay-based, cosmetic, plant biology, environmental, energy- production, and/or military uses.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides described above can undergo further modifications so as to incorporate new or modified functionalities, including manipulating the therapeutic effectiveness of the polypeptide, improving the safety profile of the polypeptide, adjusting the pharmacokinetics, pharmacologies and/or pharmacodynamics of the polypeptide (e.g., increasing water solubility, bioavailability, increasing se ⁇ im half-life, increasing therapeutic half-life, modulating immunogenicity, modulating biological activity, or extending the circulation time), providing additional functionality to the polypeptide, incorporating a tag, label or detectable signal into the polypeptide, easing the isolation properties of the polypeptide, and any combination of the aforementioned modifications.
• new or modified functionalities including manipulating the therapeutic effectiveness of the polypeptide, improving the safety profile of the polypeptide, adjusting the pharmacokinetics, pharmacologies and/or pharmacodynamics of the polypeptide (e.g., increasing water solubility, bioavailability, increasing se ⁇ im half-life, increasing therapeutic half
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides comprising utilizing a homologous non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid selected from the group consisting_of a carbonyl-containing, non-natural amino acid, a hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid.
• non-natural amino acids have been biosynthetically incorporated into the polypeptide as described herein.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides comprise at least one non-natural amino acid selected from amino acids of Formula I- XV.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides comprise at least one non- natural amino acid selected from amino acids of compounds having structures 1-4.
• any polypeptide may include at least one non-natural amino acids described herein.
• the polypeptide can be homologous to a therapeutic protein.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide may also be homologous to any polypeptide member of the growth hormone supergene family.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides may contain moieties which may be converted into other functional groups, such as, by way of example only, carbonyls or hydrazines.
• FIGS. 23 illustrates the chemical conversion of non-natural amino acid polypeptides into carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides and hydrazine containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• the resulting hydrazine- and carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides may be used in or incorporated into any of the methods, compositions, techniques and strategies for making, purifying, characterizing, and using non-natural amino acids, non-natural amino acid polypeptides and modified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein.
• the chemical conversion of chemical moieties into other functional groups, such as, by way of example only, carbonyls, or hydrazine can be achieved using documented methodologies, such as described, for example, in March, ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 5 ⁇ Ed., (Wiley 2001); and Carey and Sundberg, ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 4* Ed., VoIs.
• Fig. 19 and 21 illustrate the chemical modification of carbonyl containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides with hydrazine containing reagents.
• hydrazine containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides can chemically react with carbonyl containing reagents to form highly fluorescent indole derivative containing non-natural amino acid poypeptides under the appropriate excitation.
• a -Methods for Post-Translationally Modifying Non-Natural Amino Acid Polypeptides Synthesis of indole-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides
• the incorporation of substituted carbonyl and substituted hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acids to polypeptides provides the site-specific derivatization via the formation of an indole linkage.
• the methods for derivatizing and/or further modifying may be conducted with a polypeptide that has been purified prior to .the derivatization step or after the derivatization step.
• the methods for derivatizing and/or further modifying may be conducted with synthetic polymers, polysaccharides, or polynucleotides which have been purified before or after such modifications.
• derivatization step can occur efficiently under mildly acidic, including by way of example, between a pH of about Ho about 6.
• certain indole linkages allow the production of fluorescent non-natural amino acid polypeptides that are used in a variety of detection methods.
• Fig. 21 illustrates the site specific labeling of carbonyl containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides with hydrazine containing reagents.
• Fig. 22 illustrates the site specific labeling of hydrazine containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides with carbonyl containing reagents.
• the derivatization may be performed using reagents containing carbonyl or hydrazine groups on one end and functional groups on the other.
• the resulting indole-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides can be further modified to introduce molecules, including by a way of example only polymers, polysaccharides, or polynucleotides.
• Fig. 21 illustrates the site specific labeling of carbonyl containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides with hydrazine containing reagents.
• Fig. 22 illustrates the site specific labeling of hydrazine containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides with carbonyl containing
• the reagents of formula (XVI) are the type of carbonyl- or hydrazine- containing reagents that can be used to form indole-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides and can further be modified to introduce other molecules.
• hydrazine-containing compounds of Formula I to IV can react with reagent of Formula XVI containing carbonyl group to form indole-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• carbonyl-containing compound of Formula V to XIV can react with reagent of Formula XVI containing hydrazine group to form indole-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• each X is independently H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, substituted alkylalkoxy, polyalkylene oxide, substituted polyalkylene oxide, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkaryl, substituted alkaryl, aralkyl, substituted aralkyl, -(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-ON(R") 2 , -(alkylene or substituted alkylene)- C(O)SR", -(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-S-S-(aryl or substituted aryl), -C(O)R", -C(O) 2 R", or -C(O)N(R") 2 , wherein each R" is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted al
• is optiona], and when present, is -C(R') p -NR'-C(O)O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)- where p is 0, 1 , or 2; each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl;
• W is ⁇ W , and ⁇ * ⁇ ;
• R is H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl;
• X is a polymer comprising alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, substituted alkylalkoxy, polyalkylene oxide, substituted polyalkylene oxide, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkaryl, substituted alkaryl, aralkyl, or substituted aralkyl.
• X is a polymer comprising polyalkylene oxide or substituted polyalkylene oxide.
• X is a polymer comprising - [(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-O-( hydrogen, alkyl, or substituted alkyl)],, wherein x is from about 20 to about 10,000.
• X is m-PEG having a molecular weight ranging from about 2 to about 40 KDa.
• X is a biologically active agent selected from the group consisting of a peptide, protein, enzyme, antibody, drug, dye, lipid, nucleoside, oligonucleotide, cell, virus, liposome, microparticle, and micelle.
• X is a drug selected from the group consisting of an antibiotic, fungicide, anti- viral agent, anti-inflammatory agent, anti-rumor agent, cardiovascular agent, anti-anxiety agent, hormone, growth factor, and steroidal agent.
• X is an enzyme selected from the group consisting of horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, /3-galactosidase, and glucose oxidase.
• X is a detectable label selected from the group consisting of a fluorescent, phosphorescent, chemiluminescent, chelating, electron dense, magnetic, intercalating, radioactive, chromophoric, and energy transfer moiety.
• X is a reactive group consisting of carbonyl containing moiety and hydrazine containing moiety.
• X is a indole derivatives.
• L is selected from the group consisting of -N(R')CO-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -CON(R')-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -N(R')C(O)N(R')-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -O-CON(R')-(aIkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)N(R 1 )-, and -N(R')C(O)O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-.
• W is ⁇ L
• R is H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl.
• m-PEG or PEG groups have a molecular weight ranging from about 5 to about 30 kDa.
• W is R j s H 5 alkyl, or substituted alkyl.
• Y when present is alkyl, or substituted alkyl.
• L is -(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-N(R')C(O)O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-.
• compounds of Formula (XVII) are compounds having the structure of Formula (XX):
• W is J- , and alkyl.
• Y when is present is alkyl, or substituted alkyl.
• L is -(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-N(R')C(O)O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-.
• compounds of Formula (XXI) are compounds having the structure of Formula (XXII):
• linkers of Formula (XVII) are reactive with carbonyl- or hydrazine- containing polypeptide in aqueous solution under acidic conditions.
• acidic conditions are pH about 1 to about 6.
• Z is O or NH and n is 1 , 2, 3 and 4
• W is H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl.
• compounds of Formula (XXIII) are compounds having the structure of Formula (XXIV):
• a polypeptide comprising amino acids of Formulas I-XV and compounds having the structures 1-4, including any sub- formulas or specific compounds that fall within the scope of Formulas I-XV wherein the method comprises contacting the polypeptide comprising at least one amino acid of Formula I-XV with a reagent of Formula (XVI).
• the polypeptide is purified prior to or after contact with the reagent of Formula (XVI).
• resulting polypeptide comprises at least one carbonyl- or one hydrazine-containing amino acid of formula I-XV.
• resulting polypeptide comprises at least one indole-containing polypeptide generated from the coupling of compounds of formula I-XV with the reagent of formula (XVI).
• Figure 26 provides an illustrative example of the synthesis of bifunctional linker of formula (XXIV). Wherrin the method comprises coupling a spacer reagent containing on both ends an amine or hydroxyl group to acid containing Boc-protected hydrazine. The cleavage of Boc group leds to linkers of formula (XXIV).
• Fig 27 provides a schematic representation of post-translational modification of polypeptide containing carbonyl non-natural amino acid with reagent of formula (XXIV) to form indole containing polypeptide.
• Fig 28 provides a schematic representation of post-translational modification of polypeptide containing carbonyl non-natural amino acid with reagent of formula XX and XXIl to form indole containing polypeptide.
• Fig 29 provides a schematic representation of post-translational modification of polypeptide containing hydrazine non-natural amino acid with reagent of formula XX and XXlI to form indole containing polypeptide.
• Fig 30 illustrates examples of reagents of formula (XVIlI).
• Fig. 27 provides a representative example of the formation of such dimmer using condensation of linker of formula (XXIV) with carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• methods for preparing a polypeptides containing an indole moiety via the use of bifunctional linker wherein the method comprises:
• step (i) derivatizing a first polypeptide comprising an amino acid of Formula (1) with a bifunctional linker, and (ii) contacting the resulting derivatized protein of step (i) with a second second reagent, such as PEG.
• a second second reagent such as PEG.
• the polypeptides are purified prior to or after contact with the bifunctional linker.
• Fig. 24 shows a illustrative example of such bifunctional linker and its use to produce indole containing polypeptide attached to PEG group.
• W is ---" ⁇ *- , and alkyl, or substituted alkyl
• L is -(alkylene or substituted alky!ene)-N(R')C(O)O-(alkylene,or substituted alkylene)-.
• multiple linker chemistries can react site-specifically with a carbonyl- or a hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• the linker methods described herein utilize linkers containing the hydrazine functionality on at least one linker termini (mono, bi- or multifunctional). The reaction of an hydrazine-derivatized linker with a carbonyl-substituted protein generates an indole substituted non-natural protein.
• the linker methods described herein utilize linkers containing the carbonyl functionality on at least one linker termini (mono, bi- or multi-functional).
• the reaction of carbonyl-derivatized linker with a hydrazine-substituted protein generates an indole substituted non-natural protein.
• Figure 19 provides illustrative examples of the derivatization of carbonyl-containing Urotensin with hydrazine containing reagents.
• hydrazine-containing reagents are added to a buffered solution (pH 1 -5) of carbonyl-containing Urotensin analogs. The reaction proceeds at ambient temperature for hours to days.
• Figure 20 provides illustrative examples of the derivatization of hydrazine-containing Urotensin with carbonyl containing reagents.
• carbonyl-containing reagents are added to a buffered solution (pH 1-5) of hydrazine-containing Urotensin analogs.
• the reaction proceeds at ambient temperature for hours to days.
• such derivatized polypeptides are stable in aqueous solution for at least 1 month under mildly acidic conditions.
• such derivatized polypeptides are stable for at least 2 weeks under mildly acidic conditions.
• such derivatized polypeptides are stable for at least 5 days under mildly acidic conditions.
• such conditions are pH about 1 to about 6.
• the tertiary structure of the derivatized polypeptide is preserved.
• such derivatization of polypeptides further comprises ligating the derivatized polypeptide to another polypeptide.
• such polypeptides being derivatized are homologous to a therapeutic protein.
• compositions, methods, techniques and strategies described herein can be effected using the compositions, methods, techniques and strategies described herein. These modifications include the incorporation of further functionality onto the non-natural amino acid component of the polypeptide, including but not limited to, a desired functionality.
• compositions, methods, techniques and strategies described herein the following description will focus on adding macromolecular polymers to the non-natural amino acid polypeptide with the understanding that the compositions, methods, techniques and strategies described thereto are also applicable to adding other functionalities, including but not limited to those listed above.
• a wide variety of macromolecular polymers and other molecules can be coupled to the non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein to modulate biological properties of the non-natural amino acid polypeptide (or the corresponding natural amino acid polypeptide), and/or provide new biological properties to the non-natural amino .acid polypeptide (or the corresponding natural amino acid polypeptide).
• These macromolecular polymers can be coupled to the non-natural amino acid polypeptide via the non-natural amino acid, or any functional substituent of the non-natural amino acid, or any substituent or functional group added to the non-natural amino acid.
• Water soluble polymers can be coupled to the non-natural amino acids incorporated into polypeptides (natural or synthetic), polynucleotides, poly saccharides or synthetic polymers described herein.
• the water soluble polymers may be coupled via a non-natural amino acid incorporated in the polypeptide or any functional group or substituent of a non-natural amino acid, or any functional group or substituent added to a non-natural amino acid.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein comprise one or more non- natural amino acid(s) coupled to water soluble polymers and one or more naturally-occurring amino acids linked to water soluble polymers.
• Covalent attachment of hydrophilic polymers to a biologically active molecule represents one approach to increasing water solubility (such as in a physiological environment), bioavailability, increasing serum half-life, increasing therapeutic half-life, modulating immunogenicity, modulating biological activity, or extending the circulation time of the biologically active molecule, including proteins, peptides, and particularly hydrophobic molecules. Additional important features of such hydrophilic polymers include biocompatibility, lack of toxicity, and lack of immunogenicity. Preferably, for therapeutic use of the end- product preparation, the polymer will be pharmaceutically acceptable.
• hydrophilic polymers include, but are not limited to: polyalkyl ethers and alkoxy-capped analogs thereof (e.g., polyoxyethylene glycol, polyoxyethylene/propylene glycol, and methoxy or ethoxy- capped analogs thereof, especially polyoxyethylene glycol, the latter is also known as polyethylene glycol or PEG); polyvinylpyrrolidones; polyvinylalkyl ethers; polyoxazolines, polyalkyl oxazolines and polyhydroxyalkyl oxazolines; polyacrylamides.
• polyalkyl ethers and alkoxy-capped analogs thereof e.g., polyoxyethylene glycol, polyoxyethylene/propylene glycol, and methoxy or ethoxy- capped analogs thereof, especially polyoxyethylene glycol, the latter is also known as polyethylene glycol or PEG
• polyvinylpyrrolidones polyvinylalkyl ethers
• polyoxazolines polyalkyl ox
• polyalkyl acrylamidcs and polyhydroxyalkyl acrylamides (e.g., polyhydroxypropylmethacrylamide and derivatives thereof); polyhydroxyalkyl acrylates; polysialic acids and analogs thereof; hydrophilic peptide sequences; polysaccharides and their derivatives, including dextran and dextran derivatives, e.g., carboxymethyldextran, dextran sulfates, aminodextran; cellulose and its derivatives, e.g., carboxymethyl cellulose, hydroxyalkyl celluloses; chitin and its derivatives, e.g., chitosan, succinyl chitosan, carboxymethylchitin, carboxymethylchitosan; hyaluronic acid and its derivatives; starches; alginates; chondroitin sulfate; albumin; pullulan and carboxymethyl pullulan; polyaminoacids and derivatives thereof, e.g., polyg
• the water soluble polymer may be any structural form including but not limited to linear, forked or branched.
• polymer backbones that are water-soluble, with from 2 to about 300 termini are particularly useful.
• Multifunctional polymer derivatives include, but are not limited to, linear polymers having two termini, each terminus being bonded to a functional group which may be the same or different.
• the water polymer comprises a poly(ethylene glycol) moiety. The molecular weight of the polymer may be within a desired polymer molecular weight range.
• substantially water soluble backbones is by no means exhaustive and is merely illustrative, and that all polymeric materials having the qualities described above are contemplated as being suitable for use in methods and compositions described herein.
• a hydrophilic polymer is polyethylene glycol, abbreviated PEG, which has been used extensively in pharmaceuticals, on artificial implants, and in other applications where biocompatibility, lack of toxicity, and lack of immunogenicity are of importance.
• PEG polyethylene glycol
• the polyme ⁇ polyeptide embodiments described herein will use PEG as an example hydrophilic polymer with the understanding that other hydrophilic polymers may be similarly utilized in such embodiments.
• PEG is water soluble polymer that is commercially available or can be prepared by ring-opening polymerization of ethylene glycol according to documented methodologies (Sandler and Karo, Polymer Synthesis, Academic Press, New York, Vol. 3, pages 138-161). PEG is typically clear, colorless, odorless, soluble in water, stable to heat, inert to many chemical agents, does not hydrolyze or deteriorate, and is generally non-toxic. Polyethylene glycol) is considered to be biocompatible, which is to say that PEG is capable of coexistence with living tissues or organisms without causing harm. More specifically, PEG is substantially non-immunogenic, which is to say that PEG does not tend to produce an immune response in the body.
• PEG When attached to a molecule having some desirable function in the body, such as a biologically active agent, the PEG tends to mask the agent and can reduce or eliminate any immune response so that an organism can tolerate the presence of the agent. PEG conjugates tend not to produce a substantial immune response or cause clotting or other undesirable effects.
• PEG is used broadly to encompass any polyethylene glycol molecule, without regard to size or to modification at an end of the PEG, and can be represented as linked to a non-natural amino acid polypeptide by the formula:
• PEG includes, but is not limited to, polyethylene glycol in any of its forms, including bifunctional PEG, multiarmed PEG, derivatized PEG, forked PEG, branched PEG (with each chain having a molecular weight of from about 1 kDa to about 100 kDa, from about 1 kDa to about 50 kDa, or from about 1 kDa to about 20 kDa), pendent PEG (i.e.
• PEG or related polymers having one or more functional groups pendent to the polymer backbone), or PEG with degradable linkages therein PEG in which n is from about 20 to about 2000 is suitable for use in the methods and compositions described herein.
• the water polymer comprises a polyethylene glycol moiety.
• the molecular weight of the PEG polymer may be of a wide range including but not limited to, between about 100 Da and about 100,000 Da or more.
• the molecular weight of the PEG polymer may be within a desired polymer molecular weight range.
• a wide range of PEG molecules are described in, including but not limited to, the Shearwater Polymers, Inc. catalog, Nektar Therapeutics catalog, incorporated herein by reference.
• terminal functional groups in the literature include, but are not limited to, N- succinimidyl carbonate (see e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,281,698, 5,468,478), amine (see, e.g., Buckmann et al. Makromol. Chem. 182: 1379 (1981), Zalipsky et al. Eur. Polym. J. 19: 1177 (1983)), hydrazide (See, e.g., Andresz et al. Makromol. Chem. 179:301 (1978)), succininiidyl propionate and succinimidyl butanoate (see, e.g., Olson et al.
• succinimidyl succinate See, e.g., Abuchowski et al. Cancer Biochem. Biophys. 7: 175 (1984) and Joppich et al. Makromol. Chem. 180: 1381 (1979), succinimidyl ester (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,670,417), benzotriazole carbonate (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.
• glycidyl ether see, e.g., Pitha et al. Eur. J Biochem. 94:11 (1979), Elling et al., Biotech. Appl. Biochem. 13:354 (1991), oxycarbonylimidazole (see, e.g., Beauchamp, et al., Anal. Biochem. 131 :25 (1983), Tondelli et al. J. Controlled Release 1 :251 (1985)), p-nitrophenyl carbonate (see, e.g., Veronese, et al., Appl. Biochem.
• the PEG can terminate with a reactive group, thereby forming a bifunctional polymer.
• Typical reactive groups can include those reactive groups that are commonly used to react with the functional groups found in the 20 common amino acids (including but not limited to, maleimide groups, activated carbonates (including but not limited to, p-nitrophenyl ester), activated esters (including but not limited to, N- hydroxysuccinimide, p-nitrophenyl ester and aldehydes) as well as functional groups that are inert to the 20 common amino acids but that react specifically with complementary functional groups present in non-natural amino acids (including but not limited to, phenyl hydrazine and carbonyl groups).
• Y the other end of the PEG, which is shown in the above formula by Y, will attach either directly or indirectly to a polypeptide (synthetic or natural), polynucleotide, polysaccharide or synthetic polymer via a non-natural amino acid.
• Y is a phenyl hydrazine group
• the phenyl hydrazine-containing PEG reagent can react with a carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid in a polypeptide to form a PEG group linked to the polypeptide via an indole linkage.
• the carbonyl-containing PEG reagent can react with a phenyl hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid in a polypeptide to form a PEG group linked to the polypeptide via an indole linkage.
• FIG. 30 presents non-limiting examples carbonyl- and hydrazine-containing PEG reagents.
• a hydrazine can be reacted with a carbonyl group present in a non-natural amino acid to form an indole.
• the hydrazine can be incorporated into the polypeptide via a non-natural amino acid and used to react preferentially with a carbonyl group present in the water soluble polymer.
• at least one terminus of the PEG molecule is available for reaction with the non-natural amino acid.
• the polypeptide comprising the non-natural amino acid is linked to a water soluble polymer, such as polyethylene glycol (PEG), via the side chain of the non-natural amino acid.
• PEG polyethylene glycol
• the non-natural amino acid methods and compositions described herein provide a highly efficient method for the selective modification of proteins with PEG derivatives, which involves the selective incorporation of non- natural amino acids, including but not limited to, those amino acids containing functional groups or substituents not found in the 20 naturally incorporated amino acids, into proteins in response to a selector codon and the subsequent modification of those amino acids with a suitably reactive PEG derivative.
• Documented methodologies of a wide variety are suitable for use with the non-natural amino acid methods and compositions described herein to incorporate a water soluble polymer into the protein.
• the polymer backbone can be linear or branched. Branched polymer backbones have been generally documented.
• a branched polymer has a central branch core moiety and a plurality of linear polymer chains linked to the central branch core.
• PEG is used in branched forms that can be prepared by addition of ethylene oxide to various polyols, such as glycerol, glycerol oligomers, pentaerythritol and sorbitol.
• the central branch moiety can also be derived from several amino acids, such as lysine.
• the branched poly(ethylene glycol) can be represented in general form as R(-PEG-OH) m in which R is derived from a core moiety, such as glycerol, glycerol oligomers, or pentaerythritol, and m represents the number of arms.
• R is derived from a core moiety, such as glycerol, glycerol oligomers, or pentaerythritol
• m represents the number of arms.
• Multi-armed PEG molecules such as those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,932,462 5,643,575; 5,229,490; 4,289,872; U.S. Pat. Appl. 2003/0143596; WO 96/21469; and WO 93/21259, each of which is incorporated by reference herein for the aforementioned disclosure, can also be used as the polymer backbone.
• Branched PEG can also be in the form of a forked PEG represented by PEG(-YCHZ 2 ) n , where Y is a linking group and Z is an activated terminal group linked to CH by a chain of atoms of defined length.
• the pendant PEG has reactive groups, such as carboxyl, along the PEG backbone rather than at the end of PEG chains.
• the polymer can also be prepared with weak or degradable linkages in the backbone.
• PEG can be prepared with ester linkages in the polymer backbone that are subject to hydrolysis. As shown herein, this hydrolysis results in cleavage of the polymer into fragments of lower molecular weight: -PEG-CO 2 -PEG-+H 2 O -» PEG-CO 2 H+HO-PEG-
• polyethylene glycol or PEG represents or includes all documented forms including but not limited to those disclosed herein.
• the molecular weight of the polymer may be of a wide range, including but not limited to, between about 100 Da and about 100,000 Da or more.
• the molecular weight of the polymer may be within a desired polymer molecular weight range.
• the total molecular weight and hydration state of the PEG polymer or polymers attached to the biologically active molecule must be sufficiently high to impart the advantageous characteristics typically associated with PEG polymer attachment, such as increased water solubility and circulating half life, while not adversely impacting the bioactivity of the parent molecule.
• the methods and compositions described herein may be used to produce substantially homogenous preparations of polyme ⁇ protein conjugates. "Substantially homogenous" as used herein means that polyme ⁇ protein conjugate molecules are observed to be greater than half of the total protein.
• the polymer:protein conjugate has biological activity and the present "substantially homogenous" PEGylated polypeptide preparations provided herein are those which are homogenous enough to display the advantages of a homogenous preparation, e.g., ease in clinical application in predictability of lot to lot pharmacokinetics.
• the proportion of polyethylene glycol molecules to protein molecules will vary, as will their concentrations in the reaction mixture.
• the optimum ratio in terms of efficiency of reaction in that there is minimal excess unreacted protein or polymer
• the molecular weight of the polyethylene glycol selected and on the number of available reactive groups available As relates to molecular weight, typically the higher the molecular weight of the polymer, the fewer number of polymer molecules which may be attached to the protein. Similarly, branching of the polymer should be taken into account when optimizing these parameters. Generally, the higher the molecular weight (or the more branches) the higher the polymerrprotein ratio.
• the term "therapeutically effective amount” further refers to an amount which gives an increase in desired benefit to a patient. The amount will vary from one individual to another and will depend upon a number of factors, including the overall physical condition of the patient and the underlying cause of the disease, disorder or condition to be treated. [00471]
• the number of water soluble polymers linked to a modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptide (i.e., the extent of PEGylation or glycosylation) described herein can be adjusted to provide an altered (including but not limited to, increased or decreased) pharmacologic, pharmacokinetic or pharmacodynamic characteristic such as in vivo half-life.
• the half-life of the polypeptide is increased at least about 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 percent, two fold, five-fold, 10-fold, 50-fold, or at least about 100-fold over an unmodified polypeptide.
• a polypeptide comprising a carbonyl -containing non-natural amino acid is modified with a PEG derivative that contains a terminal arylhydrazine moiety that is linked directly to the PEG backbone.
• a polypeptide comprising a carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid is modified with a PEG derivative that contains a terminal hydrazine moiety that is linked directly to the PEG backbone.
• a polypeptide comprising a hydrazine-containing amino acid is modified with a PEG derivative that contains a terminal carbonyl moiety that is linked directly to the PEG backbone.
• the carbonyl-terminal PEG derivatives have the structure:
• R is a simple alkyl (methyl, ethyl, propyl, etc.)
• m is 2-10
• n is 100-1 ,000 (i.e., average molecular weight is between 5-40 kDa).
• the molecular weight of the polymer may be of a wide range, including but not limited to, between about 100 Da and about 100,000 Da or more.
• the molecular weight of the polymer may be within a desired polymer molecular weight range.
• the PEGylated non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein obtained from the hydrophobic chromatography can be purified further by documented methodologies including, but are not limited to, affinity chromatography; anion- or cation-exchange chromatography (using, including but not limited to, DEAE SEPHAROSE); chromatography on silica; reverse phase HPLC; gel filtration (using, including but not limited to, SEPHADEX G-75); hydrophobic interaction chromatography; size-exclusion chromatography, metal-chelate chromatography; ultrafiltration/diafiltration; ethanol precipitation; ammonium sulfate precipitation; chromatofocusing; displacement chromatography; electrophoretic procedures (including but not limited to preparative isoelectric focusing), differential solubility (including but not limited to ammonium sulfate precipitation), or extraction.
• affinity chromatography anion- or cation-exchange chromatography (using, including but not limited to, DEAE SEPHAROSE); chromatography on silica; reverse
• Apparent molecular weight may be estimated by GPC by comparison to globular protein standards (Preneta AZ, PROTEIN PURIFICATION METHODS, A PRACTICAL APPROACH (Harris & Angal, Eds.) IRL Press 1989, 293-306).
• the purity of the (non-natural amino acid ⁇ olypeptide):PEG conjugate can be assessed by proteolytic degradation (including but not limited to, trypsin cleavage) followed by mass spectrometry analysis.
• proteolytic degradation including but not limited to, trypsin cleavage
• mass spectrometry analysis including but not limited to, trypsin cleavage
• Pepinsky R.B. et.ai, J. Pharmacol. & Exp. Ther. 297(3): 1059-66 (2001).
• a water soluble polymer linked to a non-natural amino acid of a polypeptide described herein can be further derivatized or substituted without limitation.
• molecules can also be fused to the non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein to modulate the half-life in serum.
• molecules are linked or fused to the modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein to enhance affinity for endogenous serum albumin in an animal.
• albumin binding sequences include, but are not limited to, the albumin binding domain from streptococcal protein G (see. e.g., Makrides et al., J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 277(l):534-542 (1996) and Sjolander et al., J, Immunol. Methods 201:115-123 (1997)), or albumin-binding peptides such as those described in, e.g., Dennis, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 277(38):35035-35043 (2002).
• the modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein are acylated with fatty acids.
• the fatty acids promote binding to serum albumin. See, e.g., Kurtzhals, et al. , Biochem. J. 312:725-731 (1995).
• the modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein are fused directly with serum albumin (including but not limited to, human serum albumin).
• serum albumin including but not limited to, human serum albumin.
• other molecules can also be linked to non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein, to modulate binding to serum albumin or other serum components.
• the methods and compositions described herein include polypeptides incorporating one or more non-natural amino acids bearing saccharide residues.
• the saccharide residues may be either natural (including but not limited to, N-acetylglucosamine) or non-natural (including but not limited to, 3- fiuorogalactose).
• the saccharides may be linked to the non-natural amino acids either by an N- or O-linked glycosidic linkage (including but not limited to, N-acetylgalactose-L-serine) or a non-natural linkage (including but not limited to, a heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, linkage or the corresponding C- or S-linked glycoside).
• the saccharide (including but not limited to, glycosyl) moieties can be added to the non- natural amino acid polypeptides either in vivo or in vitro.
• a polypeptide comprising a carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid is modified with a saccharide derivatized with an arylhydrazine group to generate the corresponding glycosylated polypeptide linked via an indole linkage.
• a polypeptide comprising an arylhydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid is modified with a saccharide derivatized with a carbonyl group to generate the corresponding glycosylated polypeptide linked via a linkage.
• the saccharide may be further elaborated by treatment with glycosyltransferases and other enzymes to generate an oligosaccharide bound to the non-natural amino acid polypeptide. See, e.g., H. Liu. et al. J. Am. Client. Soc. 125: 1702-1703 (2003).
• FIG. 26 presents an illustrative example of the synthesis of a bifunctional homolinker in which the linker has two identical ends, i.e., hydrazine groups.
• a linker may be used to form a homodimer of a carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide to form two indole linkages.
• a partially protected linker can be used to bind the unprotected hydrazine end to a carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide via an indole linkage, leaving the other protected end available for further linking reactions following deprotection.
• FIG. 27 presents an illustrative example of protein dimerization by coupling two proteins via a bifunctiona] homoli ⁇ ker.
• FIG. 25 presents an illustrative example of the use of a heterobiftmctional linker in which the linker has two different ends, by way of example only a carbonyl group and a reactive group.
• FIG. 25 presents illustrative example of the use of a heterobifunctional linker to attach a PEG group to a non-natural amino acid polypeptide in a multi-step synthesis.
• a hydrazine- containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide reacts with a carbonyl-containing bifunctional linker to form an indole-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• the bifunctional linker still retains a reactive functional group which reacts in a second step with a PEG reagent to form a PEGylated non-natural amino acid polypeptide via a heterocycle linkage.
• 00489[ The methods and compositions described herein also provide for polypeptide combinations, such as homodimers, heterodimers, homomultimers, or heteromultimers (i.e., trimers, tetramers, etc.).
• the following description focuses on the GH supergene family members, however, the methods, techniques and compositions described in this section can be applied to virtually any other polypeptide which can provide benefit in the form of dimers and multimers, including by way of example only a therapeutic protein.
• the GH supergene family member polypeptides are linked directly, including but not limited to, via an Asn-Lys amide linkage or Cys-Cys disulfide linkage.
• the linked GH supergene family member polypeptides, and/or the linked non-GH supergene family member will comprise different non-natural amino acids to facilitate dimerization, including but not limited to, a first GH supergene family member, and/or the linked non-GH supergene family member, polypeptide comprising a carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid conjugated to a second GH supergene family member polypeptide comprising a hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid and the polypeptides are reacted via formation of the corresponding indole.
• the two GH supergene family member polypeptides, and/or the linked non-GH supergene family member are linked via a linker.
• Any hetero- or homo-bifunctional linker can be used to link the two GH supergene family member, and/or the linked non-GH supergene family member, polypeptides, which can have the same or different primary sequence.
• the linker used to tether the GH supergene family member, and/or the linked non-GH supergene family member, polypeptides together can be a bifunctional PEG reagent.
• the methods and compositions described herein provide for water- soluble bifunctional linkers that have a dumbbell structure that includes: a) an azide, an alkyne, a hydrazine, a diamine, a hydrazide, a hydroxylamine, or a carbonyl (including a dicarbonyl)-containing moiety on at least a first end of a polymer backbone; and b) at least a second functional group on a second end of the polymer backbone.
• the second functional group can be the same or different as the first functional group.
• the second functional group in some embodiments, is not reactive with the first functional group.
• the methods and compositions described herein provide, in some embodiments, water-soluble compounds that comprise at least one arm of a branched molecular structure.
• the branched molecular structure can be dendritic.
• the methods and compositions described herein provide multimers comprising one or more GII supergene family member formed by reactions with water soluble activated polymers that have the structure:
• R can be, for example, a functional group selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, protected hydroxyl, alkoxyl, N- hydroxysuccinimidyl ester, 1-benzotriazolyl ester, N-hydroxysuccinimidyl carbonate, 1 -benzotriazolyl carbonate, acetal, aldehyde, aldehyde hydrates, alkenyl, acrylate, methacrylate, acrylamide, active sulfone, amine, aminooxy, protected amine, hydrazide, protected hydrazide, protected thiol, carboxylic acid, protected carboxylic acid, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, maleimide, vinylsulfone, dithiopyridine, vinylpyridine, iodoacetamide, epoxide, glyoxals, diones, mesylates, tosylates, and tresylate, alkene, and ketone.
• linker groups can be used to link transcription factors. Genes require multiple transcription factors to efficiently initiate expression of the encoded protein. Transcription factors synthesized with non-natural amino acids can be linked, via linkers as described above, and used to enhance artificial activation of targeted genes. The linked transcription factors can bind target DNA and promote recruitment of RNA polymerase in the absence of the normal activation signal cascade, thus expressing genes without the required signal.
• ligands for cell receptors can be linked for efficient activation of the receptors. Platelet- derived Growth Factor (PDGF) forms dimers in order to bind its receptor.
• PDGF Platelet- derived Growth Factor
• linked proteins include linked antibodies. Two different antibodies, each specific for unique epitopes on the same or adjacent targets can be linked for enhanced stimulation, binding, or neutralization. For example, antibodies specific for two different epitopes found on g ⁇ l 20 and associated gp40 of HIV can be linked to provide more effective neutralization of the target. Similarly, linked antibodies can be used to stimulate cell surface receptors. For example, antibodies to CD3 as well as CD4 of the T-cell receptor can be linked to provide the necessary stimuli for activation of the receptor.
• a further embodiment includes peptides linked to nucleic acid.
• ligands for cell receptors or proteins which bind cell surfaces can be linked to a therapeutic nucleic acid that is administered to a desired target.
• the linked ligand facilitates the uptake of the nucleic acid that is then expressed within the cell to exert its therapeutic effect.
• peptides may be linked to nucleic acids to facilitate packaging or condensation of the nucleic acid.
• the functional groups on the linker do not have to be identical, nor do they have to be phenyl hydrazine groups.
• the chemistry detailed throughout this specification allows the design of a linker in which at least one functional group can form an indole group with a non-natural amino acid polypeptide; the other functional groups on the linker, in some embodiments, utilize other documented methodologies, including nucleophile/electrophile based chemistry.
• a naturally-occurring or non-natural amino acid polypeptide may be difficult to isolate from a sample for a number of reasons, including but not limited to the solubility or binding characteristics of the polypeptide.
• such a polypeptide may be isolated from a recombinant system that has been engineered to overproduce the polypeptide.
• achieving a desired level of purity often proves difficult.
• the methods, compositions, techniques and strategies described herein provide a solution to this situation.
• the methods, compositions, techniques and strategies described herein allow production of a heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide that is homologous to the desired polypeptide, wherein the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide has improved isolation characteristics.
• a homologous non-natural amino acid polypeptide is produced biosynthetically.
• the non-natural amino acid has incorporated into its structure one of the non-natural amino acids described herein.
• the non-natural amino acid is incorporated at a terminal or internal position and is further incorporated site specifically.
• the resulting non-natural amino acid as produced biosynthetically, already has the desired improved isolation characteristics.
• the non-natural amino acid comprises a heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, linkage to a group that provides the improved isolation characteristics.
• the non-natural amino acid is further modified to form a modified heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide, wherein the modification provides a heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, linkage to a group that provides the improved isolation characteristics.
• such a group is directly linked to the non-natural amino acid, and in other embodiments, such a group is linked via a linker group to the non-natural amino acid.
• such a group is connected to the non-natural amino acid by a single chemical reaction, in other embodiments a series of chemical reactions is required to connect such a group to the non-natural amino acid.
• the group imparting improved isolation characteristics is linked site specifically to the non-natural amino acid in the non-natural amino acid polypeptide and is not linked to a naturally occuring amino acid under the reaction conditions utilized.
• the resulting non-natural amino acid polypeptide is homologous to the GH supergene family members, however, the methods, techniques and compositions described in this section can be applied to virtually any other polypeptide which can benefit from improved isolation characteristics, including by way of example only, a therapeutic protein.
• the group imparting improved isolation characteristics improves the water solubility of the polypeptide; in other embodiments, the group improves the binding properties of the polypeptide; in other embodiments, the group provides new binding properties to the polypeptide (including, by way of example only, a biotin group or a biotin-binding group).
• the group is selected from the water soluble polymers described herein, including by way of example only, any of the PEG polymer groups described herein.
• a naturally-occurring or non-natural amino acid polypeptide may be difficult to detect in a sample (including an in vivo sample and an in vitro sample) for a number of reasons, including but not limited to the lack of a reagent or label that can readily bind to the polypeptide.
• the methods, compositions, techniques and strategies described herein provide a solution to this situation.
• the methods, compositions, techniques and strategies described herein allow production of a heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide that is homologous to the desired polypeptide, wherein the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide allows the detection of the polypeptide in an in vivo sample and an H! vitro sample.
• a homologous non-natural amino acid polypeptide is produced biosynthetically.
• the non-natural amino acid has incorporated into its structure one of the non-natural amino acids described herein.
• the non-natural amino acid is incorporated at a terminal or internal position and is further incorporated site specifically.
• the resulting non-natural amino acid polypeptide, as produced biosynthetically already has the desired detection characteristics.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprises at least one non-natural amino acid selected from the group consisting of a carbonyl-containing non-natural amino acid, a hydrazine-containing non-natural amino acid, including an indolc-containing amino acid to provide improved detection characteristics.
• such non- natural amino acids have been biosynthetically incorporated into the polypeptide as described herein.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprises at least one non-natural amino acid selected from amino acids of Formula I-XV. In further or alternative embodiments non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprises at least on e non-natural amino acid selected from amino acids of compounds of structures 1-4. In further or additional embodiments, the non-natural amino acid comprises an indole linkage that provides the improved detection characteristics. In further or additional embodiments, the non-natural amino acid is further modified to form a modified indole-containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide, wherein the modification provides an indole-containing linkage to a group that provides the improved detection characteristics.
• such a group is directly linked to the non-natural amino acid, and in other embodiments, such a group is linked via a linker group to the non-natural amino acid.
• such a group is connected to the non-natural amino acid by a single chemical reaction, in other embodiments a series of chemical reactions is required to connect such a group to the non-natural amino acid.
• the group imparting improved detection characteristics is linked site specifically to the non-natural amino acid in the non-natural amino acid polypeptide and is not linked to a naturally occurring amino acid under the reaction conditions utilized.
• the resulting non-natural amino acid polypeptide is homologous to the GH supergene family members, however, the methods, techniques and compositions described in this section can be applied to virtually any other polypeptide which needs to be detected in an in vivo sample and an in vitro sample, including by way of example only, a therapeutic protein.
• the group imparting improved detection characteristics is selected from the group consisting of a label; a dye; an affinity label; a photoaffinity label; a spin label; a fluorophore; a radioactive moiety; a moiety incorporating a heavy atom; an isotopically labeled moiety; a biophysical probe; a phosphorescent group; a chemiluminescent group; an electron dense group; a magnetic group; a chromophore; an energy transfer agent; a detectable label; and any combination thereof.
• an antibody is engineered to contain an indole non-natural amino acid, and the antibody recognizes a unique antigen on a cancerous cell. After labeling/or modifying the antibody with the indole-via methods described herein and purifying the labelled antibody, it is administered to a subject suspected of having a cancer that can be recognized by the labelled antibody. Following administration of the labelled antibody, presence and location of the labelled antibody within the patient can identify the presence of cancerous tissues. Administration of the labelled antibody allows for the detection of the cancer within the patient, metasteses within the subject, and/or efficacy of treatments for the cancer within the subject.
• a peptide that binds to antigens on the surface of cells is engineered to contain a dye, inlcuding but not limited to fluorescent dyes which can be used to track the peptide following administration of the peptide to a subject.
• the dye is attached to the peptide via the non-natural amino acid located within the peptide, and the peptide is administered to the subject. Localization or binding of the peptide to its ligand(s) is accomplished with documented imaging or detection techniques.
• in another embodiment is a method for detecting the presence of a polypeptide in a patient, the method comprising administering an effective amount of a homologous non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid having the structures of compounds 1-4:
• A is optional, and when present is lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower cycloalkylene, substituted lower cycloalkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted heteroalkylene, lower heterocycloalkyle ⁇ e, substituted lower heterocycloalkylene, arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, alkarylene, substituted alkarylene, aralkylene, or substituted aralkylene;
• B is optional, and when present is a linker, linked at one end to an indole-containing moiety, the linker selected from the group consisting of lower alkylene, substituted lower alkylene, lower alkenylene, substituted lower alkenylene, lower heteroalkylene, substituted lower heteroalkylene, - arylene, substituted arylene, heteroarylene, substituted heteroarylene, -O-, -O-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S-, -S-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -S(O) k - where k is 1, 2, or 3, -S(O) k (alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(O)-, -NS(O) 2 -, -OS(O) 2 -, -C(O)-(alkylene or substituted alkylene)-, -C(S)-, -C(S)-(alkylene or substituted al
• R i is H, an amino protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; and R 2 is OH, an ester protecting group, resin, at least one amino acid, polypeptide, or polynucleotide; n is O, 1 , 2, or 3, and m is O, 1, 2, or 3, provided that at least one of n or m is not O; wherein, each ring in structures 1 , 2, 3, and 4 that has an associated R a group can contain 0, 1, or 2 R 8 groups and each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, -N(R") 2 , -C(O)R", -C(O)N(R") 2 , -OR", and -S(O) k R", where k is 1, 2, or 3, where each R" is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; or when more than one R 3 group is present, two R a may optionally
• each R' is independently H, alkyl, or substituted alkyl; when more than one R 5 group is present, two ortho R 5 groups can optionally form a heterocycloalkyl or an aromatic heterocycloalkyl; or the -B-indole containing moiety together form a bicyclic or tricyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl comprising at least one indole portion; or an active metabolite, salt, or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug or solvate thereof.
• a method for detecting the presence of a polypeptide in a patient comprising administering an effective amount of a homologous non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid having the structures of compounds 1-4, wherein the at least one non-natural acid is incorporated at a specific site within the polypeptide.
• a method for detecting the presence of a polypeptide in a patient comprising administering an effective amount of • a homologous non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid having the structures of compounds 1 -4, wherein the non-natural amino acid is incorporated using a translation system.
• in another embodiment is a method for detecting the presence of a polypeptide in a patient, the method comprising administering an effective amount of a homologous non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid having the structures of compounds 1-4, wherein the non-natural amino acid is incorporated into the polypeptide using a translation system and a post translation modification system.
• Ln another embodiment is a method for detecting the presence of a polypeptide in a patient, the method comprising administering an effective-amount of a homologous non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid having the structures of compounds 1-4, wherein the at least one non-natural amino acid is stable in aqueous solution for at least 1 month.
• a method for detecting the presence of a polypeptide in a patient comprising administering an effective amount of a homologous non- natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid having the structures of compounds 1-4, wherein the at least one non-natural amino acid is stable for at least 2 weeks.
• a method for detecting the presence of a polypeptide in a patient comprising administering an effective amount of a homologous non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid having the structures of compounds 1-4, wherein the at least one non-natural amino acid is stable for at least 5 days.
• [005111 in another embodiment is a method for detecting the presence of a polypeptide in a patient, the method comprising administering an effective amount of a homologous non-natural amino acid polypeptide comprising at least one non-natural amino acid having the structures of compounds 1 -4, wherein the polypeptide is a protein homologous to a therapeutic protein selected from the group consisting of: alpha- 1 antitrypsin, angiostatin, antihemolytic factor, antibody, apolipoprotein, apoprotein, atrial natriuretic factor, atrial natriuretic polypeptide, atrial peptide, C-X-C chemokine, T39765, NAP-2, ENA-78, gro-a, gro-b, gro-c, IP-10, GCP-2, NAP-4, SDF-I, PF4, MIG, calcitonin, c-kit ligand, cytokine, CC chemokine, monocyte chemoattractant protein- 1,
• an indole-containing moiety is attached to a peptide, polypeptide, or protein via non-natural amino acids located within the peptide, polypeptide, or protein.
• Appropriately labelled peptides, polypeptides, or proteins are administered to a desired subject for detection and imaging via documented methodologies. Through these labelled peptides, polypeptides, or proteins, a variety of diseases, metabolic pathways, physiological structures or cellular components can be imaged. By way of example, fluorescent imaging microscopy can be used to detect the presence of labelled peptides, polypeptides, or proteins within a subject.
• a naturally-occurring or non-natural amino acid polypeptide will be able to provide a certain therapeutic benefit to a patient with a particular disorder, disease or condition. Such a therapeutic benefit will depend upon a number of factors, including by way of example only: the safety profile of the polypeptide, and the pharmacokinetics, pharmacologies and/or pharmacodynamics of the polypeptide (e.g., water solubility, bioavailability, serum half-life, therapeutic half-life, immunogenicity, biological activity, or circulation time).
• the safety profile of the polypeptide e.g., water solubility, bioavailability, serum half-life, therapeutic half-life, immunogenicity, biological activity, or circulation time.
• polypeptide such as an attached cytotoxic compound or drug
• additional polypeptides such as an attached cytotoxic compound or drug
• Such modifications preferably do not destroy the activity and/or tertiary structure of the original polypeptide.
• a heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide that is homologous to the desired polypeptide wherein the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide has improved therapeutic characteristics.
• a homologous non-natural amino acid polypeptide is produced biosynthetically.
• the non-natural amino acid has incorporated into its structure one of the non-natural amino acids described herein.
• the non-natural amino acid is incorporated at a terminal or internal position and is further incorporated site specifically.
• the resulting non-natural amino acid as produced biosynthetically, already has the desired improved therapeutic characteristics.
• the non- natural amino acid comprises a heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, linkage to a group that provides the improved therapeutic characteristics.
• the non-natural amino acid is further modified to form a modified heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide, wherein the modification provides a heterocycle, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, linkage to a group that provides the improved therapeutic characteristics.
• such a group is directly linked to the non-natural amino acid, and in other embodiments, such a group is linked via a linker group to the non-natural amino acid.
• such a group is connected to the non- natural amino acid by a single chemical reaction, in other embodiments a series of chemical reactions is required to connect such a group to the non-natural amino acid.
• the group imparting improved therapeutic characteristics is linked site specifically to the non-natural amino acid in the non-natural amino acid polypeptide and is not linked to a naturally occurring amino acid under the reaction conditions utilized.
• the resulting non-natural amino acid polypeptide is homologous to the GH supergene family members, however, the methods, techniques and compositions described in this section can be applied to virtually any other polypeptide which can benefit from improved therapeutic characteristics, including by way of example only, a therapeutic protein.
• the group imparting improved therapeutic characteristics improves the water solubility of die polypeptide; in other embodiments, the group improves the binding properties of the polypeptide; in other embodiments, the group provides new binding properties to the polypeptide (including, by way of example only, a biotin group or a biotin-binding group).
• the group is selected from the water soluble polymers described herein, including by way of example only the PEG polymer groups.
• the group is a cytotoxic compound, whereas in other embodiments the group is a drug.
• the linked drug or cytotoxic compound can be cleaved from the non-natural amino acid polypeptide so as to deliver the drug or cytotoxic compound to a desired therapeutic location.
• the group is a second polypeptide, including by way of example, a heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide, further including by way of example, a polypeptide that has the same amino acid structure as the first non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle. containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide is a modified heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide increases the bioavailability of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide increases the safety profile of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide increases the water solubility of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide increases the therapeutic half-life of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide increases the serum half-life of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide extends the circulation time of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide modulates the biological activity of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• the heterocycle-, including a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, containing non-natural amino acid polypeptide modulates the immunogenicity of the polypeptide relative to the homologous naturally-occurring amino acid polypeptide.
• modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described in this section have been described generically and/or with specific examples.
• the modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described in this section should not be limited to just the generic descriptions or specific example provided in this section, but rather the modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described in this section apply equally well to all modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptides comprising at least one non-natural amino acid which falls within the scope of Formulas I-XV and compounds of structures 1-4, including any sub-formulas or specific compounds that fall within the scope of Formulas I-LXV, that are described in the specification, claims and figures herein.
• the modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein find multiple uses, including but not limited to: therapeutic, diagnostic, assay- based, industrial, cosmetic, plant biology, environmental, energy-production, consumer products, and/or military uses. As a non-limiting illustration, the following therapeutic uses of modified or unmodified non- natural amino acid polypeptides are provided. [00521]
• the modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein are useful for treating a wide range of disorders, conditions or diseases. Administration of the modified or unmodified non- natural amino acid polypeptide products described herein results in any of the activities demonstrated by commercially available polypeptide preparations in humans.
• Average quantities of the modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptide product may vary and in particular should be based upon the recommendations and prescription of a qualified physician.
• the exact amount of the modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptide is a matter of preference subject to such factors as the exact type of condition being treated, the condition of the patient being treated, as well as the other ingredients in the composition.
• the amount to be given may be determined based upon therapy with the modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein are optionally employed for therapeutic uses, including but not limited to, in combination with a suitable pharmaceutical carrier.
• Such compositions for example, comprise a therapeutically effective amount of the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
• a carrier or excipient includes, but is not limited to, saline, buffered saline, dextrose, water, glycerol, ethanol, and/or combinations thereof. The formulation is made to suit the mode of administration.
• compositions comprising one or more of the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein are optionally tested in one or more appropriate in vitro and/or in vivo animal models of disease, to confirm efficacy, tissue metabolism, and to estimate dosages, according to documented methodologies.
• dosages can be initially determined by activity, stability or other suitable measures of non-natural to natural amino acid homologues (including but not limited to, comparison of a polypeptide modified to include one or more non-natural amino acids to a natural amino acid polypeptide), i.e., in a relevant assay.
• Administration is by any of the routes normally used for introducing a molecule into ultimate contact with blood or tissue cells.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein, are administered in any suitable manner, optionally with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. Suitable methods of administering the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein, to a patient are available, and. although more than one route can be used to administer a particular composition, a particular route can often provide a more immediate and more effective action or reaction than another route.
• Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are determined in part by the particular composition being administered, as well as by the particular method used to administer the composition. Accordingly, there is a wide variety of suitable formulations of pharmaceutical compositions described herein.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein and compositions comprising such polypeptides may be administered by any route suitable for proteins or peptides, including, but not limited to parenterally, e.g. injections including, but not limited to, subcutaneously or intravenously or any other form of injections or infusions.
• Polypeptide pharmaceutical compositions can be administered by a number of routes including, but not limited to oral, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, transdermal, subcutaneous, topical, sublingual, or rectal means.
• compositions comprising non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein, can also be administered via liposomes.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein may be used alone or in combination with other suitable components, including but not limited to, a pharmaceutical carrier.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides modified or unmodified, as described herein, alone or in combination with other suitable components, can also be made into aerosol formulations (i.e., they can be
• Aerosol formulations can be placed into pressurized acceptable propellants, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, propane, nitrogen, and the like.
• Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non-aqueous, isotonic sterile injection solutions, which can contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, and solutes that render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient, and aqueous and non- aqueous sterile suspensions that can include suspending agents, solubilizers, thickening agents, stabilizers, and preservatives.
• the formulations of packaged nucleic acid can be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, such as ampules and vials.
• parenteral administration and ' intravenous administration are preferred methods of administration.
• the routes of administration already in use for natural amino acid homologue therapeutics including but not limited to, those typically used for EPO, IFN, GH, G-CSF, GM-CSF, IFNs, interleukins, antibodies, and/or any other pharmaceutically delivered protein
• the routes of administration already in use for natural amino acid homologue therapeutics including but not limited to, those typically used for EPO, IFN, GH, G-CSF, GM-CSF, IFNs, interleukins, antibodies, and/or any other pharmaceutically delivered protein
• the dose administered to a patient in the context compositions and methods described herein, is sufficient to have a beneficial therapeutic response in the patient over time.
• the dose is determined by the efficacy of the particular formulation, and the activity, stability or serum half-life of the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, employed and the condition of the patient, as well as the body weight or surface area of the patient to be treated.
• the size of the dose is also determined by the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects that accompany the administration of a particular formulation, or the like in a particular patient.
• the physician evaluates circulating plasma levels, formulation toxicities, progression of the disease, and/or where relevant, the production of anti-non-natural amino acid polypeptide antibodies.
• the dose administered, for example, to a 70 kilogram patient is typically in the range equivalent to dosages of currently-used therapeutic proteins, adjusted for the altered activity or serum half-life of the relevant composition.
• the pharmaceutical formulations described herein can supplement a variety of therapies, including antibody administration, vaccine administration, administration of cytotoxic agents, natural amino acid polypeptides, nucleic acids, nucleotide analogues, biologic response modifiers, and the like.
• the pharmaceutical formulations described herein are administered at a rate determined by the LD-50 or ED-50 of the relevant formulation, and/or observation of any side-effects of the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, at various concentrations, including but not limited to, as applied to the mass and overall health of the patient. Administration can be accomplished via single or divided doses.
• Non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein can be administered directly to a mammalian subject. Administration is by any of the routes normally used for introducing a polypeptide to a subject.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein, include those suitable for oral, rectal, topical, inhalation (including but not limited to, via an aerosol), buccal (including but not limited to, sub-lingual), vaginal, parenteral (including but not limited to, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intradermal, intraarticular, intrapleural, intraperitoneal, inracerebral, intraarterial, or intravenous), topical (i.e., both skin and mucosal surfaces, including airway surfaces) and transdermal administration, although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the nature and severity of the condition being treated.
• Administration can be either local or systemic.
• the formulations can be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, such as ampoules and vials.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein can be prepared in a mixture in a unit dosage injectable form (including but not limited to, solution, suspension, or emulsion) with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein can also be administered by continuous infusion (using, including but not limited to, mirupumps such as osmotic pumps), single bolus or slow-release depot formulations.
• Formulations suitable for administration include aqueous and non-aqueous solutions, isotonic sterile solutions, which can contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, and solutes that render the formulation isotonic, and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions that can include suspending agents, solubilizers, thickening agents, stabilizers, and preservatives. Solutions and suspensions can be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets of the kind previously described.
• Freeze-drying is a commonly employed technique for presenting proteins which serves to remove water from the protein preparation of interest.
• Freeze-drying or lyophilization, is a process by which the material to be dried is first frozen and then the ice or frozen solvent is removed by sublimation in a vacuum environment.
• An excipient may be included in pre-lyophilized formulations to enhance stability during the freeze-drying process and/or to improve stability of the lyophilizcd product upon storage. Pikal, M. Biopharm. 3(9) 26-30 (1990) and Arakawa et al. Pharm. Res. 8(3):285-291 (1991 ).
• the spray drying of pharmaceuticals is documented. For example, see Broadhead, J.
• Spray drying is a useful technique because it can convert a liquid pharmaceutical preparation into a fine, dustless or agglomerated powder in a one-step process.
• the basic technique comprises the following four steps: a) atomization of the feed solution into a spray; b) spray-air contact; c) drying of the spray; and d) separation of the dried product from the drying air.
• U.S. Patent Nos. 6,235,710 and 6,001,800 which are herein incorporated by reference for the aforementioned disclosure, describe the preparation of recombinant erythropoietin by spray drying.
• compositions described herein may comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient or stabilizer.
• Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are determined in part by the particular composition being administered, as well as by the particular method used to administer the composition. Accordingly, there is a wide variety of suitable formulations of pharmaceutical compositions (including optional pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers) for the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, described herein, (see, for example, in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Nineteenth Ed (Easton, Pa.: Mack Publishing Company, 1995); Hoover, John E., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pennsylvania 1975; Liberman, H.A.
• Suitable carriers include buffers containing succinate, phosphate, borate, HEPES, citrate, imidazole, acetate, bicarbonate, and other organic acids; antioxidants including but not limited to, ascorbic acid; low molecular weight polypeptides including but not limited to those less than about 10 residues; proteins, including but not limited to, serum albumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers including but not limited to, polyvinylpyrrolidone; amino acids including but not limited to, glycine, glutamine, asparagine, arginine, histidine or histidine derivatives, methionine, glutamate, or lysine; monosaccharides, disaccharides, and other carbohydrates, including but not limited to, trehalose, sucrose, glucose, mannose, or dextrins; chelating agents including but not limited to, EDTA and edentate disodium; divalent metal ions including but not limited to, zinc, cobalt, or copper
• Suitable surfactants include for example but are not limited to polyethers based upon poly(ethylene oxide)-poly(propylene oxide)-poly(ethylene oxide), i.e., (PEO-PPO-PEO), or polypropylene oxide)-poly(ethylene oxide)-poly(propylene oxide), i.e., (PPO-PEO-PPO), or a combination thereof.
• PEO-PPO- PEO and PPO-PEO-PPO are commercially available under the trade names PluronicsTM, R-PluronicsTM, TetronicsTM and R-TetronicsTM (BASF Wyandotte Corp., Wyandotte, Mich.) and are further described in U.S. Pat. No.
• ethylene/polypropylene block polymers may be suitable surfactants.
• a surfactant or a combination of surfactants may be used to stabilize PEGylated non-natural amino acid polypeptides against one or more stresses including but not limited to stress that results from agitation. Some of the above may be referred to as “bulking agents.” Some may also be referred to as “tonicity modifiers.”
• Antimicrobial preservatives may also be applied for product stability and antimicrobial effectiveness; suitable preservatives include but are not limited to, benzyl alcohol, benzalkonium chloride, metacresol, methyl/propyl parabene, cresol, and phenol, or a combination thereof.
• the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein, including those linked to water soluble polymers such as PEG can also be administered by or as part of sustained-release systems.
• Sustained-release compositions include, including but not limited to, semi-permeable polymer matrices in the form of shaped articles, including but not limited to, films, or microcapsules.
• Sustained-release matrices include from biocompatible materials such as poly(2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate) (Langer et al., J. Biomed. Mater. Res., 15: 267-277 (1981); Langer, Chein.
• Sustained-release compositions also include a liposomally entrapped compound.
• Liposomes containing the compound are prepared by methods such as: DE 3,218,121; Eppstein et al., hoc. Natl. Acad. ScL U.S.A., 82: 3688-3692 (1985); Hwang et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL U.S.A., 77: 4030- 4034 (1980); EP 52,322; EP 36,676; EP 143,949; EP 142,641; Japanese Pat. Appln. 83-118008; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,485,045, 4,619,794, and 4,544,545; and EP 102,324.
• Liposomally entrapped polypeptides can be prepared by methods described in, e.g., DE 3,218,121; Epstein et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL U.S.A., 82: 3688-3692 (1985); Hwang et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL U.S.A., 77: 4030-4034 (1980); EP 52,322; EP 36,676; EP 88,046; EP 143,949; Japanese Pat. Appln. 83-1 18008; U.S. Patent Nos. 4,485,045, 5,021,234, and 4,544,545; and EP 102,324.
• composition and size of liposomes are documented methodologies. Some examples of liposomes as described in, e.g., Park JW, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 92: 1327-1331 ( 1995); Lasic D and Papahadjopoulos D (eds): MEDICAL APPLICATIONS OF LIPOSOMES ( 1998); Drummond DC, et al.. Liposomal drug delivery systems for cancer therapy, in Teicher B (ed): CANCI3R DRUG DISCOVERY AND DEVELOPMENT (2002); Park JW, et al., Clin. Cancer Res. 8:1172-1 181 (2002); Nielsen UB, et al, Biochim. Biophys. Acta 1591(1 or 2):109-l 18 (2002); Mamot C, et at., Cancer Res. 63: 3154-3161 (2003).
• the dose administered to a patient in the context of the compositions, formulations and methods described herein, should be sufficient to cause a beneficial response in the subject over time.
• the total pharmaceutically effective amount of the non-natural amino acid polypeptides, modified or unmodified, as described herein, administered parenterally per dose is in the range of about 0.01 ⁇ g/kg/day to about 100 ⁇ g/kg, or about 0.05 mg/kg to about 1 mg/kg, of patient body weight, although this is subject to therapeutic discretion.
• the frequency of dosing is also subject to therapeutic discretion, and may be more frequent or less frequent than the commercially available products approved for use in humans.
• a polyme ⁇ polypeptide conjugate including by way of example only, a PEGylated polypeptide, as described herein, can be administered by any of the routes of administration described above.
• non-natural amino acid polypeptides modified or unmodified, as described herein (including but not limited to, synthetases, proteins comprising one or more non-natural amino acids, etc.) will confer different physical and chemical characteristics on the polypeptide in which it resides. The usefulness of such characteristics will depend upon the structure of the non-natural amino acid, the structure of the modification on the non-natural amino acid, or both, and can be evaluated via experimental models that assess structure-function relationships of test polypeptides. 1005431 In any given experimental model, a non-natural amino acid is substituted for a natural amino acid in a desired polypeptide or protein.
• the protein is derivatized with a library of alternate R groups. These R groups are reacted with the non-natural amino acid contained within the polypeptide or protein.
• the library of R groups is chosen by their structural or chemical similarity to the R-group of the replaced amino acid.
• the protein is then screened for function or activity within the appropriate test system.
• phenylalanine is replaced with a non-natural amino acid within a protein.
• a library of alternative R groups with similar characteristics to the R group of phenylalanine are then added to the non-natural amino acid.
• a single alternative R group is added to a non-natural R groups added include rings, hetero-rings, conjugated rings, or other chemical moieties that confer, but not limited to, similar chemical and structural characteristics.
• the derivitized protein is then screened for function or functions related to the addition of the newly substituted non-natural amino acid by testing in an appropriate experimental model.
• experimental models include, but are not limited to, based assays, cell free assays, cell-based assays, tissue culture models, and animal models.
• indoles are substituted on the non-natural amino acid for pharmacophore activity in drug discovery or as fluorescent cores useful in detection.
• indole-based R groups or R groups suitable for indole synthesis are added to the non-natural amino acid by conducting indole formations in aqueous buffers at room temperature with an optomized two-step reaction. Following this reaction, the derivitized protein is screened for its desired activity.
• the effect of non-natural amino acid substitutions in the acid alpha-glucosidase enzyme (GAA) on alleviation of Pompe disease can be evaluated in a mouse model for Pompe disease.
• a library of GAA molecules which contain various amino acid substitutions at chosen sites within the enzyme can be created and expressed via the methods and compositions disclosed herein.
• the non-natural amino acid containing enzymes can then be evaluated for their activity in a mouse model for Pompe disease (mice which are bred to be genetically diffident for GAA (GAA-/-)), either in unmodified or post-translationally modified forms as disclosed herein.
• the non-natural amino acid containing enzymes can be administered intravenously, orally, or any other route of administration that allows for efficient protein transport and absorption. Efficacy of administration, enzyme half-life, and alleviation of Pompe disease can be evaluated, for example, by measurements of glycogen degredation and/or clearance in the mice, assessment of serum levels of GAA, changes or reduction in cardiomegaly, cardio myopathy, skeletal myopathy.
• modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptides described herein are useful in a wide range of industiral applications. Use of the modified or unmodified non-natural amino acid polypeptide products described herein results in any of the activities demonstrated by commercially available polypeptide preparations in industrial applications.
• enzymes for the production of ethanol can be modified with non-natural amino acids and assayed for changes in function.
• a library of alcohol dehydrogenase II and pyruvate decarboxylase enzymes which contain various non-natural amino acid substitutions can be created and expressed via the methods and compositions disclosed herein.
• the non-natural amino acid modified enzymes can then be screened for changes in their efficiency of ethanol production conferred by or as a result of the non-natural amino acid substitions.
• Increases in, but not limited to, affinity for substrate and rate of conversion can be screened by documented methodologies, and applied to the industrial production of ethanol.
• Further examples of industrial application of the methods and compositions disclosed herein include environmental clean-up of herbicides and pesticides.
• the removal of a commonly used herbicide, atrazine, from contaminated soil is facilitated by enzymes that metabolize the atrazine, thus rendering it non-toxic.
• a library of modified antrazine chlorohydrolase enzymes which contain non-natural amino acid substitutions can be created and expressed via the methods and compositions disclosed herein.
• the library of non-natural amino acid modified atrazine cholorhydrolase enzymes can then be screened for changes in ability to dechlorinate atrazine found in the environment as well as any new modes of atrazine metabolism conferred by or as a result of the non-natural amino-acid substitutions.
• changes in enzyme efficiency can be assessed via documented methodologies, including but not limited to, increases in metabolism of atrazine or intermediates.
• the sidechain on a non-natural amino acid polypeptide can be an aldehyde group, and the reactive moiety is an aryl hydrazine connected to a water-soluble polymer, at least one amino acid or a detectable label.
• FIG. 8 Presented in Figures 8, 9, 10, 1 1, 13 and 14 is a model reaction between two molecules to form an indole.
• Either of the two starting materials can be present as a sidechain on a non-natural amino acid polypeptide provided that the other reagent represents a functional group on a compound for derivatizing the aforementioned sidechain. That is, the sidechain on a non-natural amino acid polypeptide can be an aryl hydrazine group, and the reactive moiety is a ketone connected to a water-soluble polymer, at least one amino acid or a detectable label.
• the sidechain on a non-natural amino acid polypeptide can be a ketone group, and the reactive moiety is an aryl hydrazine connected to a water-soluble polymer, at least one amino acid or a detectable label.
• Example 6 Urotensin Analogs Containing an Aryl Hydrazine Non-Natural Amino Acid
• FIG. 20 Presented in Figure 20 is a Urotensin analog that includes, at the "X" position, a non-natural amino acid with an aryl hydrazine sidechain.
• the compound was chemically synthesized using standard techniques. Ft is to be understood that the sidechain alternatively can include a ketone, an aldehyde, or a protected carbonyl sidechain (shown schematically in Figure 21).
• Example 7 Indole Formation for the Derivafization of Non-Natural Amino Acids
• Figures 20, 21 , 22, 24, 28 and 29 are examples of how the formation of indole moieitics from the reaction of aryl hydrazines with carbonyl groups can be used to derivatize non-natural amino acid polypeptides.
• the protein 'cartoon' shown in these figures can be urotensin, human growth hormone, insulin, an antibody, a kinase, erythropoietin, or any other polypeptide or protein described herein or available in the literature.
• Example 8
• This example details cloning and expression of a modified polypeptide in E. coli.
• An introduced translation system that comprises an orthogonal tRNA (O-tRNA) and an orthogonal aminoacyl tRNA synthetase (O-RS) is used to express the polypeptide containing a non-natural amino acid.
• the O-RS preferentially aminoacylates the O-tRNA with a non-natural amino acid.
• the translation system inserts the non-natural amino acid into the polypeptide, in response to an encoded selector codon.
• Amino acid and polynucleotide sequences of O-tRNA and O-RS useful for the incorporation of non-natural amino acids are described in U.S. Patent application serial no.
• Refolding is performed by dialysis at 4 ' C overnight in 5OmM TRIS-HCl, pH8.0, 40 ⁇ M CuSO 4 , and 2% (w/v) Sarkosyl. The material is then dialyzed against 2OmM TRIS- HCl, pH 8.0, 10OmM NaCl, 2mM CaCl 2 , followed by removal of the His-tag. See Boissel et al., (1993) 268: 15983-93. Methods for purification of polypeptides are are confirmed by SDS-PAGE, Western Blot analyses, or electrospray-ionization ion trap mass spectrometry and the like.
• the quality of each PEGylated mutant hGH is evaluated by three assays before entering animal experiments.
• the purity of the PEG-hGH (PEGylated via an indole linkage) is examined by running a 4-12% acrylamide NuPAGE Bis-Tris gel with MES SDS running buffer under non-reducing conditions (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA). The gels are stained with Coomassie blue.
• the PEG-hGH band is greater than 95% pure based on densitometry scan.
• the endotoxin level in each PEG-hGH is tested by a kinetic LAL assay using the KTA 2 kit from Charles River Laboratories (Wilmington, MA), and is less than 5 EU per dose.
• the biological activity of the PEG-hGH is assessed with a IM-9 pSTAT5 bioassay, and the EC 50 value confirmed to be less than 15 nM.
• Compound concentrations are measured using antibody sandwich growth hormone ELISA kits from either BioSource International (Camarillo, CA) or Diagnostic Systems Laboratories (Webster, TX). Concentrations are calculated using standards corresponding to the analog that is dosed. Pharmacokinetic parameters are estimated using the modeling program WinNonlin (Pharsight, version 4.1). Noncompartmental analysis with linear-up/log-down trapezoidal integration is used, and concentration data is uniformly weighted.
• hGH wild-type protein WHO hGH
• His-tagged hGH polypeptide his-hGH
• His-tagged hGH polypeptide comprising non-natural amino acid indole covalently linked to 30 kDa PEG at each of six different positions are compared to WHO hGH and (his)- hGH.
• Plasma samples are taken over the regular time intervals and assayed for injected compound as described. Concentration vs time curves are evaluated by noncompartmental analysis (Pharsight, version 4.1).
• Rats are administered either a bolus dose or daily dose subcutaneously. Throughout the study rats re daily and sequentially weighed, anesthetized, bled, and dosed (when applicable). Blood is collected from the orbital sinus using a heparinized capillary tube and placed into an EDTA coated rnicrofuge tube.
• Plasma is isolated by centrifugation and stored at -8O 0 C until analysis. The mean (+/- S.D.) plasma concentrations are plotted versus time intervals.
• Turner syndrome chronic renal failure, Prader-Willi syndrome, children with intrauterine growth retardation, idiopathic short stature, growth failure associated with chronic high dose glucocorticoid use, post- transplant growth failure, X-linked hypophosphatemic rickets, inflammatory bowel disease, Noonan syndrome, bone dysplasia, growth failure associated with Celiac's disease, muscle wasting associated, e.g., with advance acquired immunodeficiency syndrome, promote healing of burns, side effects of severe dieting for obese individuals, fybromyalgia, chronic fatigue syndrome, debilities associated with aging, and other uses of human growth hormone.
• hypertension a history of any primary hematologic disease; history of significant hepatic, renal, cardiovascular, gastrointestinal, genitourinary, metabolic, neurologic disease; a history of anemia or seizure disorder; a known sensitivity to bacterial or mammalian-derived products, PEG, or human serum albumin; habitual and heavy consumer to beverages containing caffeine; participation in any other clinical trial or had blood transfused or donated within 30 days of study entry; had exposure to hGH within three months of study entry; had an illness within seven days of study entry; and have significant abnormalities on the pre-study physical examination or the clinical laboratory evaluations within 14 days of study entry. All subjects are evaluated for safety and all blood collections for pharmacokinetic analysis are collected as scheduled. All studies are performed with institutional ethics committee approval and patient consent.
• Study Design This will be a Phase I, single-center, open-label, randomized, two-period crossover study in healthy male volunteers. Eighteen subjects are randomly assigned to one of two treatment sequence groups (nine subjects/group). GH is administered over two separate dosing periods as a bolus s.c. injection in the upper thigh using equivalent doses of the PEGylated hGH comprising a non-naturally encoded amino acid and the commercially available product chosen. The dose and frequency of administration of the commercially available product is as instructed in the package label. Additional dosing, dosing frequency, or other parameter as desired, using the commercially available products may be added to the study by including additional groups of subjects.
• Each dosing period is separated by a 14-day washout period.
• Subjects are confined to the study center at least 12 hours prior to and 72 hours following dosing for each of the two dosing periods, but not between dosing periods. Additional groups of subjects may be added if there are to be additional dosing, frequency, or other parameter, to be tested for the PEGylated hGH as well.
• Multiple formulations of GH that are approved for human use may be used in this study.
• HumatropeTM (Eli Lilly & Co.), NutropinTM (Genentech), NorditropinTM (Novo-Nordisk), GenotropinTM (Pfizer) and Saizen/SerostimTM (Serono)) are commercially available GH products approved for human use.
• the experimental formulation of hGH is the PEGylated hGH comprising a non-naturally encoded amino acid.
• Blood Sampling Serial blood is drawn by direct vein puncture before and after administration of hGH.
• Venous blood samples (5 mL) for determination of serum GH concentrations are obtained at about 30, 20, and 10 minutes prior to dosing (3 baseline samples) and at approximately the following times after dosing: 30 minutes and at 1, 2, 5, 8, 12, 15, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60 and 72 hours. Each serum sample is divided into two aliquots. All serum samples are stored at -2O 0 C. Serum samples are shipped on dry ice. Fasting clinical laboratory tests (hematology, serum chemistry, and urinalysis) are performed immediately prior to the initial dose on day 1, the morning of day 4, immediately prior to dosing on day 16, and the morning of day 19.
• Bioanalvtical Methods An ELISA kit procedure (Diagnostic Systems Laboratory [DSL], Webster TX), is used for the determination of serum GH concentrations.
• Safety Determinations are recorded immediately prior to each dosing (Days 1 and 16), and at 6, 24, 48, and 72 hours after each dosing. Safety determinations are based on the incidence and type of adverse events and the changes in clinical laboratory tests from baseline. In addition, changes from pre-study in vital sign measurements, including blood pressure, and physical examination results are evaluated.
• Post-dose serum concentration values are corrected for pre-dose baseline GH concentrations by subtracting from each of the post-dose values the mean baseline GH concentration determined from averaging the GH levels from the three samples collected at 30, 20, and 10 minutes before dosing. Pre- dose serum GH concentrations are not included in the calculation of the mean value if they are below the quantification level of the assay.
• Pharmacokinetic parameters are determined from serum concentration data corrected for baseline GH concentrations. Pharmacokinetic parameters are calculated by model independent methods on a Digital Equipment Corporation VAX 8600 computer system using the latest version of the BIOAVL software.
• the following pharmacokinetics parameters are determined: peak serum concentration (C ux ); time to peak serum concentration (I 110x ); area under the concentration-time curve (AUC) from time zero to the last blood sampling time (AUCc 72 ) calculated with the use of the linear trapezoidal rule; and terminal elimination half-life (tie), computed from the elimination rate constant.
• the elimination rate constant is estimated by linear regression of consecutive data points in the terminal linear region of the log-linear concentration-time plot.
• the mean, standard deviation (SD), and coefficient of variation (CV) of the pharmacokinetic parameters are calculated for each treatment.
• the ratio of the parameter means preserved formulation/non-preserved formulation) is calculated. [005801 Safety Results The incidence of adverse events is equally distributed across the treatment groups.
• Example 15 Comparison of water solubility of PEGylated hGH and non-PEGylated hGH
• 00584 The water solubility of hGH wild-type protein (WHO hGH), His-tagged hGH polypeptide (his-hGH), or His-tagged hGH polypeptide comprising non-natural amino acid indole covalently linked to 30 kDa PEG at position 92 are obtained by determining the quantity of the respective polypeptides which can dissolve on 100 ⁇ L of water.
• the quantity of PEGylated hGH is larger than the quantities for WHO hGH and hGH which shows a that PEGylation of non-natural amino acid polypeptides increases the water solubility.
• Example 16 In Vivo Studies of modified therapeutically active non-natural amino acid polypeptide (00585] Prostate cancer tumor xenografts are implanted into mice which are then separated into two groups. One group is treated daily with a modified therapeutically active non-natural amino acid polypeptide and the other group is treated daily with therapeutically active natural amino acid polypeptide. The tumor size is measured daily and the modified therapeutically active non-natural amino acid polypeptide has improved therapeutic effectiveness compared to the therapeutically active natural amino acid polypeptide as indicated by a decrease in tumor size for the group treated with the modified therapeutically active non-natural amino acid polypeptide.
• Example 17 Measurement of non-natural amino acid polypeptide activity and affinity [00586] This example details the measurement of non-natural amino acid polypeptide activity and affinity of non-natural amino acid polypeptides for their receptor, binding partner, or ligand.

Landscapes

• Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
• Organic Chemistry (AREA)
• Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
• Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
• Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
• Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
• Saccharide Compounds (AREA)
• Indole Compounds (AREA)

Priority Applications (5)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Publications (1)

Family

ID=39536734

Family Applications (2)

Family Applications Before (1)

Country Status (8)

Cited By (20)

Families Citing this family (2)

Citations (4)

Family Cites Families (1)

• 2007
  • 2007-12-18 CA CA002672205A patent/CA2672205A1/en not_active Abandoned
  • 2007-12-18 EP EP07869463A patent/EP2079687A1/en not_active Withdrawn
  • 2007-12-18 AU AU2007333737A patent/AU2007333737A1/en not_active Abandoned
  • 2007-12-18 WO PCT/US2007/088009 patent/WO2011028195A2/en active Application Filing
  • 2007-12-18 CN CNA2007800469737A patent/CN101578264A/zh active Pending
  • 2007-12-18 KR KR1020097014780A patent/KR20090100407A/ko not_active Application Discontinuation
  • 2007-12-18 JP JP2009543156A patent/JP2010512800A/ja active Pending
  • 2007-12-18 WO PCT/US2007/088011 patent/WO2008077079A1/en active Application Filing
  • 2007-12-18 MX MX2009006617A patent/MX2009006617A/es not_active Application Discontinuation

Patent Citations (4)